DS9 Document EFTA01126198

Canon EOS WeetT3i EOS 60O cn 521 The 'Software Stan Guide' and .Ouick Reference Guide" are provded at end of this manual. INSTRUCTION MANUAL EFTA01126198 Introduction The EOS REBEL T3i/EOS 600D is a high-performance, digital single- lens reflex camera featuring a fine-detail CMOS sensor with approx. 18.0 effective megapixels, DIGIC 4, high-precision and high-speed 9- point AF, approx. 3.7 fps continuous shooting, Live View shooting. and Full High-Definition (Full HD) movie shooting. The camera is highly responsive for shooting at anytime, provides many functions fitted for advanced shooting, and offers many other features. Refer to This Manual while Using the Camera to Further Familiarize Yourself with the Camera With a digital camera, you can immediately view the image you have captured. While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they come out. You can then better understand the camera. To avoid botched pictures and accidents, first read the "Safety Warnings' (p.297, 298) and "Handling Precautions" (p.14. 15). Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability After shooting, playback and check whether the images have been properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused. Copyrights Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded images or copyrighted music and images with music in the memory card for anything other than private enjoyment. Also be aware that certain public performances. exhibitions. etc., may prohibit photography even for private enjoyment. This camera is compatible with SD memory cards. SDHC memory cards, and SDXC memory cards. This manual wd refer to al these cards as just 'card." • The camera does not come with a card for recording Images. Please purchase it separately. 2 EFTA01126199 Item Check List Before starling, check that all the following items have been included with your camera. If anything is missing. contact your dealer. Camera (with eyecup and Cody cap) Wide Strap EW.100DEI III E Battery Pack LP{8 (wen protecbve cover) Interlace cable ! Battery Cha ger ecee,..e Stereo AV Cable AVC.DC400ST O EOS DIGITAL Software Camera Solution Disk Instruction Instruction Manual (Software CD-ROM) Manual (this booklet) (CD-ROM) ' Battery Charger LC-E8 or LC-E8E is provided. (The LC-E8E comes with a power card.) • If you purchased a Lens Kit. check that the lens is included. • Depending on the Lens Kit type, the lens instruction manual might also be included. • Be careful not to lose any of the above items. Software Instruction Manual Trio software Instruction Manuals are kicluded in the CD-ROM as PDF fees. See page 304 for instructions to look up manuals in the Software Instruction Manual. 3 EFTA01126200 Conventions Used in this Manual Icons in this Manual : Indicates the Main Dial. <AY> <410.> : Indicates the <<.> cross keys. <C), : Indicates the setting button. 64. 66. 610. O16 : Indicates that the respective function remains active for 4 sec.. 6 sec.. 10 sec.. or 16 sec. respectively after you let go of the button. ' In this manual. the icons and markings indicating the cameras buttons, dials. and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the LCD monitor. • : Indicates a function which can be changed by pressing the <MENU> button and changing the setting. * : If shown on the upper right of the page. It indicates that the function is available only in the Creative Zone modes (p.22). (p7) : Reference page numbers for more information. (4, : Tip or advice for better shooting. ? : Problem-solving advice. • : Warning to prevent shooting problems. : Supplemental information. Basic Assumptions • All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch has already been set to <ON> (p.32). • It is assumed that all the menu settings and Custom Functions are set to the default. • For explanatory purposes, the instructions show the camera attached with an EF-S18-55mm f13.5-5.6 IS II lens. 4 EFTA01126201 Chapters For first-time DSLR users, Chapters 1 and 2 explain the camera's basic operations and shooting procedures. Introduction 2. I Getting Started 25 • 2 Basic Shooting and Image Playback 49 . 3 Creative Shooting 73 • 4 Advanced Shooting 93 • 5 Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting) in . 6 Shooting Movies 141 . 7 Handy Features les . 8 Wireless Flash Photography 189. 9 Image Playback 201 . 10 Post-Processing Images no . 11 Printing Images 235 • 12 Customizing the Camera 249 0 13 Reference 259. 14 Software Start Guide am . 15 Quick Reference Guide and Instruction Manual Index aos . 5 EFTA01126202 t Contents at a Glance Shooting Shoot automatically -3 p.49- 63 (Basic Zone modes) • Shoot continuously -3 p.88 ea Continuous shooting) • Take a picture of yourself In a group -3 p.69 (6) Self-beer) • Freeze the action -3 p.94 (Tv Shutter-or-orgy PE) • Blur the action • Blur the background 4 p.56 (CD creative Auto) • Keep the background In sharp focus p.96 (Av aperture-orlootYAM • Adjust the image brightness (exposure). p.103 (Exposure compensation) • Shoot in low light 4 p.50, 90 Flash photography) p.79 OSO speed setting) • Shoot without flash -6 p.55 (tp Flash OM p.58, 64 () Flash OM • Photograph firewodcs at night i p.100 (Bulb exposure) • Shoot while viewing the LCD monkor -3 p.124 (re Lire View shooting) • Shoot movies 4 p.141 (id Movie shooing) Image Quality • Shoot with image effects matching the subject 4 p.61 (Selecting a Pcture style) • Make a larval:a pilot of the *tire. p.76 (IL. IL. ell) g EFTA01126203 ram • Take many pictures ir 4 p.76 (e151. AR. 52. 53) • Change the point of focus i p.85 (ED AF point setection) • Shoot a moving subject 4 p.62, 84 (Ai servo An • View the Images with the camera 4 p.71 gp masted* • Search for pictures quickly • Rate Images • -P revent important images from accidental deletion • -D elete unnecessary images • Auto play images and movies 4 p.202 OR Index display) p.2031U Inv. beaming) 4 p.206 (Ratings) 4 p.222 (B image pitied) 4 p.224 (b Delete) 4 p.215 owe snow) • Viewthe Images or movies on a TV set 4 p.218 (Video OUT) • Set the LCD monitor brightness 4 p.167 (LCD molter lightness) Printing • Print pictures easily 4 p.235 (Direct One%) wt,F.4.7 1 dill ■ 7 EFTA01126204 Index to Features Power Image Quality Battery Image.recording quality 4 p.76 • Charging -a p.26 • Picture Style 4 p.81 • Instalog/Removing 4 p.28 • White balance 4 p.117 • Battery check 9 p.33 • Color space 4 p.121 • Power outlet 4 p.260 • Image enhancement features • Auto power off 4 p.32 • Auto Lighting Optimizer 4 p.109 • Lens peripheral Card illumination correction 4 p.110 • insertingiRemoving 4 p.29 • Noise reduction • Format 4 p.45 for long exposures • Noise reduction 4 p.253 • Release shutter without for Ngh ISO speeds 4 p.254 card 4 p.166 • Highlight tone priority 4 p.254 Lens AF • Attaching/Detaching 4 p.36 • AF mode 4 p.83 • Zoom 4 p.37 • AF point selection 4 p.85 • Image Stabilizer 4 p.38 • Manual focusing 4 p.87 Basic Settings I. Drive • Dioptric adjustment 4 p.39 • Drive modes 4 p.20 • Language 4 p.35 • Continuous shooting 4 p.88 • Date/Time 4 p.34 • Self-timer 4 p.89 • Beeper 4 p.166 • Maximum burst 4 p.77 • Using the LCD monitor 4 p.31 • LCD Off/On 4 p.179 Shooting • LCD brightness • ISO speed 4 p.79 adjustment 4 p.167 • Feature guide 4 p.48 • Oukk Control 4 p.41 Recording Images IF . Creative Auto 4 p.56 • Create/select a folder 4 p.168 • Program AE 4 p.74 • File No. 4 p.170 • Shutter-priority AE 4 p.94 • Aperture-priority AE 4 p.96 • Manual exposure 4 p.99 • Bulb 4 p.100 8 EFTA01126205 Index to Features • Mirror lockup 4 p.122 Image Playback • Automatic Depth-of-field • Image review time 4 p.166 AE 4 p.101 • Single image display p.71 • Metering mode 4 p.102 • Shooting information • Remote control 4 p.261 display p.226 • Index display 4 p.202 Exposure Adjustments • Image browsing • Exposure compensation 4 p.103 (Jump display) 4 p.203 • AEB 9 p.105 • Magnify 4 p.204 • AE lock 9 p.107 • Rotate 4 p.205 • Ratings 4 p.206 Flash • Movie playback 4 p.212 • Built-In flash 4 p.90 • Editing out movie's • Flash exposure firstflast scene 4 p.214 compensation 4 p.104 • Slide show 4 p.215 • FE lock ► p.108 • Viewing images on TV 4 p.218 • External flash 4 p.263 • Protect 4 p.222 • Flash control 9 p.180 • Erase 4 p.224 • Wire4ess flash 3 p.189 • Quick Control 4 p.208 Live View Shooting Image Editing • Live View shooting 4 p.123 • Creative filters 4 p.230 • Focusing 4 p.131 • Resize 4 p.233 • Aspect ratio 4 p.129 • Grid display 4 p.129 Printing o Quick Control 3 p.126 • PictBridge 4 p.235 • Print Order (DPOF) 4 p.245 Shooting Movies • Movie shooting 4 p.141 Customization • Quick Control 4 p.149 • Custom Functions (C.Fn) p.250 • Sound recording 4 p.160 • My Menu 4 p.258 • Grid display 4 p.161 • Video snapshot 4 p.153 Software • Movie digital zoom 4 p.152 • Install 4 p.303 • Manual exposure 4 p.144 • Software Instruction Manual 4 p.304 9 EFTA01126206 Contents introduc i Conventions Used in NB Manual 4 Chaplets 5 Contents at a Glance 6 index to Fealties Handling Precautions 14 Oukk Stan Guide 16 I Getting Startea ll Installing and Removing the Battey Installing and Removing the Card 29 Using the LCD Monitor 31 Tuning on the Power 32 Setting the Date and Time 30 Selecting the Interlace Language 35 Attaching and Detaching a Lens 36 About the Lens Image Stabilizer.. 38 OMB Menu Operations 43 Feemaning the Card 45 Switching the LCD Monitor Display 47 Festive Guide 48 2 Basle Shooting and ah W Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intagent Pao).... .................... _ 50 W Flit Auto (Scene Intelligent Auto) Techniques 53 CD Disabling Flash.. 55 0 Creative Auto Sheeting 56 • Shooting Portraits 59 ZS Sheeting Landscapes 60 S Shooting Close-ups 61 4th Shooting Moving Sul:Sects 62 ri Shooting Peetrans at eight 63 @ Chick Central 60 Shoot by Ambience Selection. 65 Shoot by Lignithg or Scene Noe 68 CI Image Playback 71 10 EFTA01126207 Contents 3 CreatIve Shan P. Program AE 74 Selling the anage.recorcang Duality 76 ISO: Changing the ISO Speed 79 a:t. Selecting the Subject's Optimal Image Characterlstios (Picture Style) 81 A5: Changing the Aulolocus Mode (A? Mode) 83 133 Selecting the AF Pohl 85 Subjects Difficult to Focus 87 MF: Manual Focusáng 87 % Continuous Sheeting 88 S USN the SeiMimer 89 S Using the Built-in Flash 90 Tv: Acisti Shots 94 Av: Changing the Depth of Field 96 Depth of Field Preview 98 M: Manual Exposure.. 99 A•DEP: Automatic Depth-of-Field AE 101 CO Chamyng the Metering Mode 102 Ara se Selling Exposure Compensation 103 Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB) 105 * Loan° the Exposure (AE Lock) 107 * Locking the Flash Exposure (FE Lock) 108 Correcting tie Brightness and Cutest Adornalcally (Alto Lighearg (MAIN() 109 Correcting the image's Dark Comers 110 .t:t. Customizing Image Characteristics (Picture Style) 112 ct:t. Registering Preferred Image Characteristics (Piaul. Style).. 115 M. Matching the Light Source (Write Batance) 117 e Aclusting the Color Tale for the Light Source 119 Selling the Color Reproduction Range (Color Space) 121 Mwror Lock-up to Reduce Camera Shake 122 Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shoo a Shooting Mtn the LCD Monitor 124 Shooting Function Settings 128 a Menu Function settings 129 Changing the Autolcos Mode 131 11 EFTA01126208 Contents •IIS Shooting Movies 102 Shooting Function Settings 149 using Movie Dgital Zoom.. 152 Taking Video Snapshots 153 7 Handy Fikaugl in Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness 187 Creating and Selecting a Folder 158 File Numbering Methods 170 Setting CognigN Information 172 Auto Rotation at Vertical Images 174 INFO. Checking Camera Settings... 175 Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings 178 Turning the LCD Monitor CIWOn 179 Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color... 179 Setting the Flash 180 Automatic Sensor Cleaning 184 Appending Dust Delete Data... 185 Manual Sensor Clearing 187 8 Wireless Flash Photo Using Wireless Flash 190 Easy Wireless Flash Shooting 191 CuSIOM Viceless Flash Shooting 194 9 knage Play a Searching for Images Quickly 202 ‘74./Ci Magrdied View 204 CS Rotating the Image 205 I. Enjoying Movies 210 12 EFTA01126209 Contents 'W Playing Movies 212 3: Editing a Movie's First and Last Scenes ............................. Slide Show (Auto Playback) 215 Viewing the Images on TV 218 B Protecting Images 222 b Erasing Images 224 10 Post-Processing imag4Il l ht Resfze 233 11 Printing Preparing to Print 238 " DOW Print Order Formal (000F) 245 Direct Printing with CPC. 248 -12 Customizing the Corneal Rego 'et etg My Menu 258 13 Reference Using s ficusehold Power Outlet 280 Remote Control Shooting 281 External Speetlites 263 Using Eye-Fl Cards 265 Ftmclion Availability Table According to Shooting Modes 268 Menu Settings 270 System Map 276 Troubleshooting Guide... 278 Error Codes 287 Specifications 288 Safety Warnings 297 14 Software Start Gu 301 Stir! Guid- 302 15 Quick Reference Guide and Instruction Manual Index 305 Quick Reference Guide 306 13 EFTA01126210 Handling Precautions Camara Care • This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical shock. • The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater. If you accidentaly drop the camera into water. promptly consult your nearest Canon Service Center. Wipe off any water droplets with a dry cloth. If the camera has been exposed to salty air, wipe it with a well-wrung wet cloth. • Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such as a magnet or electric motor. Also avoid using or leaving the camera near anything ernitting strong radio waves such as a large antenna. Strong magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data. • Do not leave the camera in excessive heat such as in a car in direct sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction. • The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to disassemble the camera yourself. • Use a blower to blow away dust on the lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, and focusing screen. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to dean the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt. take the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center. • Do not touch the camera's electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause camera misoperation. • If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room. condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag. • If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to avoid damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and battery from the camera, and wait until the condensation has evaporated before using the camera. • If the camera a not be used for an extended period. remove the battery and store the camera in a cool. dry. wel-venblated location. Even while the camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a while to check that the camera is stdl working. • Avoid storing the camera where there are corrosive chemicals such as a darkroom or chemical lab. • If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions before using it. If you have not used the camera for some tree or if there is an important shoot coming up. have the camera checked by your Canon dealer or check the camera yourself and make sure it is working properly. 14 EFTA01126211 Handling precautions Contacts LCD Monitor • Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, there might be a few dead pixels among the remaining 0.01% IX less pmts. Dead pixels displayng only black or red. etc.. are not a malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded. • If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period, screen bum-in may cocas where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days. • In low or high temperatures. the LCD monitor display may seem slow or it might look black. It will return to normal at room temperature. Cards To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following: • Do rot drop, bend. or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force. physical shock. or vibration. • Do rot touch the card's electronic contacts with your fingers or anythkig metalic. • Do rot store or use the card near anything having a strong magnetic field such as a TV set speakers, or magnet. Aso avoid places prone to having static electricity. • Do rot leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source. • Store the card ki a case. • Do not store the card n hot dusts cc humid locations. Lens After detaching the lens from the camera, attach the lens caps or put down the lens with the rear end up to avad scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts. Cautions During Prolonged Use If you use contfluous shooting. Live View shooting, or movie shooting for a prolonged period, the camera may become hot. Although this is not a malfunction, holding the hot camera for a long period can cause s►ght ski, bums. About smudges adhering to the front of the sensor Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases lubricant from the camera's internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor. In case visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor cleaning. having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended. 15 EFTA01126212 Quick Start Guide Insert the battery. (p.28) • To charge the battery. see page 26. 2 Insert a card. (p.29) • With the card's label facing toward the camera back. insert it into the slot. 3 Rod indn • . • .\\ Attach the lens. (p.36) • Nign the lens' white or red index with the camera's index In the matching color. Set the lens focus mode switch to <AF>. (p.36) 5 Set the power switch to <ON>, and set the Mode Dial to <GI> (Scene Intelligent Auto). (p.50) • Al the necessary camera settings will be set automatically. 16 EFTA01126213 Ouick Stan Guide 7 Flip out the LCD monitor. (p.31) • When the LCD monitor displays the date/time setting screen. see page 34. Focus the subject. (p.40) • Look through the viewfinder and aim the viewfinder center over the subject. • Press the shutter button halfway. and the camera will focus the subject. • If necessary. the built-in flash will pop-up automatically. Take the picture. (p.40) • Press the shutter button completely to take the picture. 9 Review the picture. (p.166) • The captured image will be displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the LCD monitor. • To display the image again, press the <0> button (p.71). • To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see 'Live View Shooting' (p.123). • To view the images captured so far, see 'Image Playback" (p.71). • To delete an Image. see 'Erasing Images' (p.224). 17 EFTA01126214 Nomenclature The names in bold indicate the parts mentioned up until the "Basic Shooting and Image Playback" section. Power switch (p.32) <imp, Display button (p.47.152.167.179) .050,150 speed Wens button (p.79) <CI:, Main Dial Shutter button (p40) Redmye feduCOCni 50114 net irenp (p.91/89) Remo* Wiled senses (0.122.261) Culp Miter (p.122.1871 Mode Dial 1p 22) Bu901n fiesta, -assist beam (p.90.16) EF Lens mount Index (p.36) EFiS Lens mount Index (p.36) Flesh-Sync contacts Hot shOe (0.263) c-Elm Focal plane mark (p.61) Strap mount (p25) Contacts (p16) Lens mount Lens lock pit Body cap 36) Mcroplione (p.142) <5> Rash Outten (0 .90) Terrrsnal cover Lens release button (P.37) Oegtvoiclield preview button (0991 MOdvideot3DT(- Digmllermnal(p.221,236) Pamela Control terminal (p.262) External rricrephone IN termnal (p.160) HOPS Merl OUT terminal (p.216) 18 EFTA01126215 Nomenclature Eyecup IP 352) VIewfindef 1Y•Pine <POO., Into button (p.47.71.126.146.176) eMEN(Ia Menu button (p.43) LCD monitor ((p.31.43.167) eased> Aperture: —' Exposure compensalion button W.99/103) Trpcd socket <I381/1, Quick Control button/ Dacct pint button (p411241) <CI' Playback button (p.71) <8> Setting button(p.43) e*a Cross keys (p.43) eA 31(g' While balance stied.= button (p.117) cV 3:1. a Picture St)le urethan button (pen 4 Qin (f0 Drive mode setecttan button (p.88.89) ca AN SF mode sekobon button W.113) Dioptric adjustment knob (p.39) cap Live View Sheeting( wee soling button (p.124/142) <*/C33e., AE lock, FE lock button/ Index/Reduce button (p.107/1011/202/204.243) <(p/k> AF point selection/ meglee button (p.85(204.243) Card slOt (929) Speaks (p.212) Card slot cover (p.29) DC cad hale (p.260) mass lamp (p.30) Battery compartment cover release lever tp25) Battery compartment cover (P.28) b, Erase button (p.224) 19 EFTA01126216 NOnendature Shooting Settings Display (in Creative Zone modes. p.22) Shutter speed Exposure level indicator Exposure ccenponsation j amount 0.1031 AEB range I.D.105) Shooting mode Picture Style (pit; AF mode (p.S3) - ONE910T ore-Sho AF Al FOCUS N Focus AF Al SERVO N Savo AF MF Manual Focusing Duck Control con (pAl) J White balance (p.117) ED Auto 00)001 0. Shade st Cloudy TungSten Ighl White 0u:western light S Flash boa Custom estuary chock (p.33) — MC CEO= Dive mode WASS) 0 Single shooting %I Continuo's shooting SOB -Umet:10 see/Remote eantrOl 'Oa Sed-erner2 sec dic Sonaimetcontinuaus EyeFl vensmisshn swan" (o 265)— Displayed when the buit-in flash is popped up. '2: Displayed if an Eye-Fi card is used. The display will show only the settings currently applied. Aperture r Main Pal pomp (p 93) r— Aule Lghting OFCMZer (" 09) n — ISO *Peed (PM 1/ 25 F56 n3200 ;3..2..1.9. el. : 2.:31, Oa-% SY3 4E SIlO telt a a Highlight tone priority IP 254) 19 Flash exposure corrpensalico (p.104) r'S External Sash ..POSure OrnpernatiOn Buitin Rash Nrc Senor 10181) Imagorecordng quality (9 76) IL Largserine IL lagoNcond AM mmlumFine AM 1.40‘mtkimd AM Small Urine A51 Snell litIcnn$ $2 Smell 53 Smal Wine) cis RAW ®+I L RIMumFre — Number ef possible shots Number of possible *rats during WB bracketing — Setktmec countdown —if %Wile balance CarreChen 1p.119) • Wme balance braCk0019 (PAM — taverna mode 19.102) Evakiallve metering CO Penal mewing 0 Spa maiarny E3 Center-..roomed mane ineleno0 20 EFTA01126217 Nomenclature Viewfinder Information Spot meterng did. AF point ,Ictival ion Indicalor c , Facusng screen 7 FAF points AE IoW MEI rfiorelYeaa <S> Flash-ready Improper FE lock waning .cy„, HO-speed %in — (FP Otero S* S FE lock( FEB in-progress cells Flash exposure COMPenSMOn <ISO, ISO speed <2> While balance Car130 an L c• , Focus Max. burst confirmation ligM c$Mg a Monochrome shooing — ISO speed cEia> HoNighl tore piccity Exposure level macabre Exuma comosnesson amount MEI range Redeye roducton Larro-on nacabr — Ap.rl UM Shutter speed FE bck (FEL) Busy (MAST) Bash recycling (S buSY) Card lull warning (FuLLI Card error warning (Card) No card warring (Card) The display will show only tie settivs currently applied. 21 EFTA01126218 NCOleildaluf0 Mode Dial The Mode Dial includes the Basic Zone modes, Creative Zone modes. and the Movie shooting mode. Creative Zone These modes give you more control for shooting various subjects. P : Program AE (p.74) Tv : Shutter-priority AE (p.94) Av : Aperture-priority AE (p.96) M : Manual exposure (p.99) A-DEP : Automatic depth-of-field AE (p.101) Basic Zone All you do is press the shutter button. The camera sets everything to suit the subject. : Scene Intelligent Auto (p.50) ED . Flash Off (p.55) r•) . Creative Auto (p.56) Image Zone • : Portrait (p.59) : Landscape (p.60) • : Close-up (p.61) : Sports (p.62) • : Night Portrait (p.63) 4: Movie shooting (p.141) 22 EFTA01126219 Nomenclature Lens Lens wkhout a distance scale Focusim dng (p.87.138) Focus mode switch (p.36) Z0Om ring (p 371 Head mount Zoom povbon Index 1p 37) (02341) Mortice.] (kcal of lens) (p.294) Image StabUtzer switch Ip.38) Lens mount index 1p.36) Contacts p 151 Lens with a distance scale r Hood mount Aker thread Wont Of tens) W Z94) Zoom ring (p 37) FOW1M9 Mk (0 87.138) Image Stabilizer switch (p.38) — Focus mode switch (p 361 Zoom position index (p 37j °Mance scale Contacts tp.15) Lens mount index 1p.36) 23 EFTA01126220 NOffiesIdatur0 Battery Charger LC-E8 Charger for Battery Pack LP-E8 (p.28). Power plug Battery pack slot Charge lamp Full-charge lamp IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAYE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. DANGER-TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK. CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS. For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A.. use an attachment plug adapter of the proper configuration for the power outlet, if needed. Battery Charger LC-E8E Charger for Battery Pack LP-E8 (p.26). Battery pack slot Charge lamp Full-charge lamp Power cord socket — Prover cord 24 EFTA01126221 Getting Started This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start shooting and basic camera operations. Attaching the Strap Pass the end of the strap through the camera's strap mount eyelet from the bottom. Then pass it through the strap's buckle as shown in the illustration. Pull the strap to take up any slack and make sure the strap will not loosen from the buckle. • The eyepiece covet* is also A attached to the strap (p.262). EFTA01126222 LC-E8E Charging the Battery Remove the protective cover. • Detach the protective cover provided with the battery. 2 Attach the battery. • As shown in the illustration, attach the battery securely to the charger. • To detach the battery, follow the above procedure In reverse. Recharge the battery. For LC-E8 • As shown by the arrow, flip out the battery charger's prongs and insert the prongs into a power outlet For LC-E8E • Connect the power cord to the charger and insert the plug into the power outlet. ► Recharging starts automatically and the charge lamp turns orange. ► When the battery is fully recharged. the full-charge lamp will turn green. • It takes approx. 2 hours to fully recharge a completely exhausted battery at 23°C / 73°F. The time required to recharge the battery depends on the ambient temperature and the battery's charge level. • For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (WC - 101C ) 43°F - 50`F) will take a longer time (up to 4 hours). 26 EFTA01126223 Charging the Battery 4 , Tips for Using the Battery and Charger • Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged. Recharge the battery before using. • Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it Is to be used. Even during storage. a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its power. • After recharging the battery, detach It and unplug the charger from the power outlet. • When not using the camera, remove the battery. If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small amount of power current is released, resulting in excess discharge and shorter battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover (provided) attached. Storing the battery after it is fully charged can lower the battery's performance. • The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries. The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/ 60 Hz power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available plug adapter for the respective country or region. Do not attach any portable voltage transformer to the battery charger. Doing so can damage the battery charger. • If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully charged, the battery has reached the end of its service life. Purchase a new battery. • After disconnecting the charger's power plug. do not touch the prongs for at least 3 sec. • Do not charge any battery other than a Battery Pack LP£8. • The Battery Pack LP-E8 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it with an inoompattle battery charger or product may resit n malfunction or accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable. 27 EFTA01126224 Installing and Removing the Battery Installing the Battery Load a fully charged Battery Pack LP-E8 into the camera. Open the cover. • Slide the lever as shown by the arrows and open the cover. 2 Insert the battery. • Insert the end with the battery contacts. • Insert the battery until it locks In place. 3 Close the cover. • Press the cover until it snaps shut. Removing the Battery Open the cover and remove the battery. • Press the battery release lever as shown by the arrow and remove the battery. • To prevent short circuiting of the battery contacts, be sure to attach the protective cover (provided. p.26) to the battery. After opening the battery compartment cover, be careful not to swing it back further. Otherwise, the hinge might break_ 28 EFTA01126225 Installing and Removing the Card The card (sold separately) can be an SD. SDHC. or SDXC memory card. The captured images are recorded onto the card. 0 Make sure the card% write-protect switch is set upward to enable writingierasing. Installing the Card 1 Open the cover. • Slide the cover as shown by the arrows to open it. Possible shots 3 Insert the card. • As shown by the illustration, face the card% label side toward you and insert It until it clicks in place. Close the cover. • Close the cover and slide it in the direction shown by the arrows until it snaps shut. • When you set the power switch to <0N>, the number of possible shots (p.33) will be displayed on the LCD monitor. • The number of possible shots depends on the remaining capacity of the card. image-recording quality. ISO speed. etc. • Setting [Or Release shutter without card) to [Disable) will prevent you from forgetting to insert a card (p.166). 29 EFTA01126226 L_ Removing the Card Th ..... Access lamp a • 1 Open the cover. • Set the power switch to DOFF >. • Make sure the access lamp is off, then open the cover. • If Recording ..' is displayed. close the cover. 2 Remove the card. • Gently push in the card, then let go. The card will stick out. • Pull the card straight out, then close the cover. When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are being written to or read by the card, being erased. or data is being transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time. Also, never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or blinking. Otherwise. It can damage the image data, card, or camera. • Removing the card. • Removing the battery. • Shaking or banging the camera around. • If the card already contains recorded images. the image number might not start from 0001 (p.170). • Do not touch the card's contacts with your fingers or metal objects. • If a card-related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor, remove and reinsert the card. If the error persists. use a different card. If you can transfer all the images on the card to a computer. transfer all the images and then format the card with the camera (p.05). The card may then return to normal. 30 EFTA01126227 Using the LCD Monitor Alter you flip out the LCD monitor, you can set menu functions, use Live View shooting, shoot movies, and playback Images and movies. You can change the direction and angle of the LCD monitor. Flip out the LCD monitor. 2 Rotate the LCD monitor. • When the LCD monitor is swung out, you can rotate it up or down or lace it lanyard toward the subject. • The indicated angle Is only approximate. 3 Face it toward you. • Normally. face the LCD monitor toward you. 0 Be careful not to force and break the hinge when rotating the LCD monitor. .11 • When not using the camera. close the LCD monitor back with the screen facing inward. This wit protect the screen. • Durkig Live View shooting or movie shooting, facing the LCD monitor toward the subject wit display a mirror image on the screen. • Depending on the angle of the LCD monitor. the display may turn off right before the LCD monitor is closed. 31 EFTA01126228 Turning on the Power If you turn on the power switch and the date/time setting screen appears, see page 34 to set the date/time. <ON> : The camera turns on. <OFF> : The camera is turned off and does not operate. Set to this position when not using the camera. About the Automatic Self-Cleaning Sensor • Whenever you set the power switch to <ON> or <OFF>, the sensor cleaning will be executed automatically. During the sensor cleaning, the LCD monitor will display <la >. Even during the sensor cleaning. you can still shoot by pressing the shutter button halfway (p.40) to stop the sensor cleaning and take a picture. • If you repeatedly turn the power switch <ON>J<OFF> at a short interval, the <la > Icon might not be displayed. This is normal and not a problem. Er About Auto Power Off • To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after about 30 seconds of non-operation. To turn on the camera again, just press the shutter button halfway (p.40). • You can change the auto power-off time with [V Auto power off) (p.167). If you set the power switch to <OFF, while an image is being recorded to the card. (Recording will be displayed and the power will turn off after the card finishes recording the nage. 32 EFTA01126229 Turrig on the Power Checking the Battery Level When the power switch is set to <ON>. the battery level will be indicated in one of four levels: A 514) Battery Life Temperature At 23°C i 73°F At VC /3rF No Flash Approx. 550 shots Approx. 470 shots 50% Flash Use Approx. 440 shots Approx. 400 shots • The figures above a e based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8. no Live View shooting. and CIPA (Camera 8 Imaging Products Association) testing standards. • The Battery Grip 8G-E8 approximately doubles the number of possible shots with two LP-E8 batteries kistalled. With size-AA/LR6 alkaline batteries, the number of possible shots at 23°C 173°F is approx. 470 shots without flash use and approx. 270 shots with 50% flash use. ( ) • Battery level is OK. 0 • Battery level is low, but still enough for now. a Battery will be exhausted soon. (Blinks) O Battery must be recharged. • The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following operations: • Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period. • Often activating only the AF without taking a pcture. • Using the LCD morirtor often. • Using the lens Image Stabilizer. • The lens operation is powered by the camera's battery. Depending on the lens used. the number of possible shots may be lower. • For the number of possible shots with Live View shoaling. see page 125. 33 EFTA01126230 111101 Setting the Date and Time When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time has been reset, the Date/Time setting screen will appear. Follow steps 3 and 4 to set the date/time. Note that the dateltime appended to recorded Images will be based on this date/time setting. Be sure to set the correct datehlme. Daleir"r "1 (02/21i10II) of (,reel Display the menu screen. • Press the <MENU> button to display the menu screen. Under the (V] tab, select (Date/ Time]. • Press the <0.> key to select the [irl tab. • Press the <AY> key to select Mate/ Time}, then press <e>. 3 Set the date and time. • Press the <0 > key to select the date or time number. • Press <C)> so <0> is displayed. • Press the <AT> key to set the number, then press <8›. (Returns to a.) 4 Exit the setting. • Press the c•410.> key to select 10K!. then press <a>. I. The date/time will be set. If you store the camera without the battery or if the cameras battery becomes exhausted. the date/tome might be reset. If this happens. set the datenrne agan. The datenime set wig start from when you press <e> in step 4. 34 EFTA01126231 Li If LCO bnchtness lm off tort ecn 2 St OW/1mq 02/2S/11 1230 Lanc.....pe • !NW; Woo WM. NW Sem/ cleaning Fernve suck (nab* Selecting the Interface Language Display the menu screen. Press the <MENU> button to display the menu screen. - 2 Under the [4o] tab, select [Languagedfl. • Press the co> key to select the IV) tab. • Press the <AY> key to select ILanguager9) (the fourth item from the top). then press <e>. lbeinf Saab Mks Itnals falai 4,0 Dlanul swim pat Final WM Rawls 1S2 Suomi ever a>,OI MOW Bit YOSasi Set the desired language. • Press the <4>> key to select the language, then press <6>. ► The interface language will change. 35 EFTA01126232 Attaching and Detaching a Lens Attaching a Lens White index 40), Remove the caps. • Remove the rear lens cap and the body Cap by turning them as shown by the arrows. 2 Attach the lens. • Align the lens' red or white index with the camera's index matching the same color. Turn the lens as shown by the arrow until it snaps in place. 13 On the lens. set the focus mode switch to <AF> (autofocus). fat • If it Is set to <MF> (manual focus). autofocus will not operate. A Remove the front lens cap. Minimizing Dust • When changing lenses. do it w a place with minimal dust • When stating the camera without a lens attached. be sure to attach the body cap to the camera. • Remove dust on the body cap before attachkig it 36 EFTA01126233 Attaching and Detaclung a Lens About Zooming Detaching the Lens To zoom. turn the zoom ring on the lens with your fingers. If you want to zoom, do it before focusing. Turning the zoom ring after achieving focus may throw off the focus slightly. While pressing the lens release button, turn the lens as shown by the arrow. • Turn the lens until it stops. then detach it. • Attach the rear lens cap to the detached lens. • Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause loss of vision. • If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autdocusing, do not touch the rotating part. Image Conversion Factor Since the image sensor size is smaller than the 35mm film format. it will look like the lens focal length m increased by approx. 1.6x. Image sensor Site(Approx.) aZ3x149rm/018x099fil 35mm (nage tate (36x 24 mm 1.42 x 0.94 rij 37 EFTA01126234 About the Lens Image Stabilizer When you use the IS lens' built-in Image Stabilizer, camera shake is corrected to obtain a sharper shot. The procedure explained here is based on the EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II lens as an example. • IS stands for Image Stabilizer. Set the IS switch to <ON>. • Set also the camera's power switch to <ON>. 2 Press the shutter button halfway. ► The Image Stabilizer will operate. 3 Take the picture. • When the picture looks steady in the viewfinder, press the shutter button completely to take the picture. • The Image Stabilizer may not be effective if the subject moves at the time of exposure. • The Image Stabilizer may not be effective for excessive shaking such as on a rocking boat. • The Image Stabilizer can operate with the focus mode switch set to either < AF> or <MF>. • If the camera is mounted on a tripod. you can save battery power by switching the IS switch to <OFF>. • The Image Stabilizer is effective even when the camera is mounted on a monopod. • Some IS lenses enable you to switch the IS mode manually to suit the shooting conditions. However, the following lenses switch the IS mode automatically: • EF-518-55mm f13.54.6 IS II • EF-S18-135mm f13.5-5.6 IS • EF-515-85mm f13.5-5.6 IS USM • EF-S18-200mm f13.5-5.6 IS 38 EFTA01126235 Basic Operation Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity Turn the dioptric adjustment knob. • Turn the knob left or right until the nine AP points in the viewfinder look sharp. If the camera's dioptdc adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder image. using rhoptric Adjustment Lens E (10 types, sold separately) is recommended. Holding the Camera To obtain sharp images. hold the camera still to minimize camera shake. Horizontal shoo ing 1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly. 2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand. 3. Press the shutter button lightly with your right hand's index finger. 4. Press your arms and elbows tightly against the front of your body. 5. To maintain a stable stance. place one foot in front of the other. 6. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder. a To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see page 123. 39 EFTA01126236 Basic Operation Shutter Button The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely. Pressing halfway This activates autofocusing and the automatic exposure system that sets the shutter speed and aperture. The exposure setting (shutter speed and aperture) is displayed in the viewfinder (84). While you press the shutter button halfway. the LCD monitor will turn off (p.179). Pressing completely This releases the shutter and takes the picture. Preventing Camera Shake Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure Is called camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake, note the following: • Hold and steady the camera as shown on the previous page. • Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus. then slowly press the shutter button completely. • If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely immediately. the camera wd take a moment before it takes the picture. • Even during the menu display. image playback, and rage recording. you can instantly go back to shooting-ready by pressing the shutter button halfway. 40 EFTA01126237 g Quick Control for Shooting Functions You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the LCD monitor. This is called the Quick Control screen. Basic Zone modes Press the <2> button. ► The Quick Control screen will appear (610). 2 Set the desired function. • Press the <.:.> key to select the function to be set. ► The selected function and Feature guide (p.48) will appear. • Turn the <!-/—",> dial to change the setting. Creative Zone modes P "ma ao 3 Take the picture. • Press the shutter button completely to take the picture. ► The captured image will be displayed. ..Tij For the functions settabte in Basic Zone modes and the setting procedure. see page 64. 41 EFTA01126238 Quid Control for Shame° FtMCHOAS Settable Functions on Quick Control Screen Mkte balance correction' (p.119) Shutter speed (p.94) Shooting mode' (p.22) -, EVO6Lte comonsacal MB seers (p.103. 105) - Picture Site (p.81) AF mode (p.831 White balance (0.1111 Aperture (p.96) — Highlight tone priority (p.254) M LILA F5.6 6:3200 [-tN re, oNEsicT czki [Do M.IL Shultr :reed a Drive mode WM. 89) Metering mode (p.1021- ISO speed (p.79) Flash exposure compensation (p.1O4) BLalt-in flash function Image-recording quality (P.78) Auto Lighting Optenizer (VIM White balance Ixacke4Ing' (p.120) 31 Asterisked functions cannot be set with the Chick Control sawn. Function Setting Screen Abel bre an a Soh swats tom cmintssagesal • Select the desired function and press Ce>. The function's setting screen will appear. • Press the < a.> key or turn the <ei."<$.> dial to change the setting. There are also functions to be set with the <INFO.> button. • Press <8> to finalize the setting and to return to the Quick Control screen. 42 EFTA01126239 CM Menu Operations With menus, you can set various functions such as the image-recording quality, date/time. etc. While looking at the LCD monitor, use the <MENU> button, < • > cross keys, and co> button on the camera back to operate the menus. Menu Screen In the Basic Zone. Movie shooting mode. and Creative Zone. the tabs and menu options displayed will be different. Basic Zone modes Movie shooting mode INS *MN owe...eta. Swer••••••••• Creative Zone modes 4. Set-up D. Playback 3' Shooting Tab Menu items * My Menu _ Oua:rty II AL Beep ( Enable Rekase shutter without Card) Image review ( 12 sec. Peripheral alumin. correct.) Red-eye reduc. I Disable ,Pash contrce Menu setting; 43 EFTA01126240 IMBI Metro Operations Menu Setting Procedure !Qua,/ ONO Melrose tow without coo lope teeter Ietc. Petrel trust correct. rd -en oda. Dude am a frail Mow Omer *Moo rani I "%It TV* 2 XI NIVitli SAO COMM fled-fYIP flikif Pude Off I trope noire. lsec. 4 sec ae tic rue FT Overt, Ono Era Th e shofar rancor, two mar mit* asec. lifforseraleorlit ccorkt. fled-eye odor Creftle Display the menu screen. • Press the <MENU> button to display the menu screen. 2 Select a tab. • Press the co> key to select a menu tab. 3 Select the desired item. • Press the <0> key to salad the Item, then press <e>. 4 Select the setting. • Press the <AV> or <••• > key to select the desired setting. (Some settings require you to press either the <AT> or <0> key to select it.) • The current setting is indicated in blue. 5 Set the desired setting. • Press <C), to set it. 6 Exit the setting. • Press the <MENU> button to return to the shooting settings display. • In step 2. you can also turn the <nt, dial to select a menu tab. • The explanation at menu (unctions hereinafter assumes that you have pressed the <MENU> button to display the menu screen. • For details about each menu item. see page 270. 44 EFTA01126241 MB Formatting the Card If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or computer. format the card with the camera. When the card Is formatted, all Images and data in the card will be erased. Even protected Images will be erased, so make sure there is nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer the images to a computer, etc., before formatting the card. Auto Mete Cel 30 "SC Adelco:re O1OP Forte, Fie nuebree, Select later Screen coa edible dr. Al dr. Ad be lee, 3 lb CAI ..reel teed e.e I r Cancel Select [Format]. • Under the [VI tab, select [Format]. then press Cep.. 2 Format the card. • Select [OK]. then press <0>. ► The card will be formatted. ► When the formatting is completed. the menu will reappear. • For low-level formatting, press the cb> button to checkmark [Low level format] with <V>, then select [OK]. 45 EFTA01126242 E Fcanstbng the Card 4 Execute (Format] in the following cases: • The card is new. • The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer. • The card is full with images or data. • A card-related error is displayed (p.287). About Low-level Formatting • Do low-level formatbng if the card's recording or reading speed seems slow or if you want to totally erase all data in the card. • Since low-level formatting will erase all recordatee sectors in the card, the formatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting. • You can stop the low-level formatting by selecting (Cancel). Even in this case, normal formatting we have been completed and you can use the card as usual. • When the card is formatted or data is erased. only the file management nformatiort is changed. The actual data is not completely erased. Be aware of this when seang or discardng the card. When discarding the card. execute low-level formatting or destroy the card physicaly to prevent the data from being leaked. • Before using a new Eye-Fl card. the software in the card must be Installed In your computer. Then format the card with the camera [I] • The card capacity drsplayed on the card format screen might be smaller than the capacity indicated on the card. • This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft. 46 EFTA01126243 Switching the LCD Monitor Display The LCD monitor can display the shooting settings screen, menu screen. captured images. etc. Shooting Settings go ( 514) __74,. '\;t 7 --- ;---;---- egze al7 Menu Functions • When you turn on the power switch. the shooting settings will be displayed. • When you press the shutter button halfway, the display will turn off. And when you let go of the shutter button, the display will turn on. • You can also turn off the display by pressing the <0IW.> button. Press the button again to turn on the display. • Pressing the <INFO.> button toggles between the shooting settings screen (p.20) and camera settings screen (p.175). • Appears when you press the <MENU> button. Press the button again to return to the shooting settings screen. Captured Image • Appears when you press the <0> button. Press the button again to return to the shooting settings screen. • You can set (9. LCD offion btn) so that the shooting settings display does not keep turning off and on (p.179). • Even when the menu screen or captured image is displayed, pressing the shutter button will enable you to shoot immediately. • 47 EFTA01126244 Feature Guide The Feature guide is a simple description of the respective function or option. It is displayed when you change the shooting mode or use the Quick Control screen to set a shooting function. Live View shooting, movie shooting, or playback. When you select a function or option on the Quick Control screen, the Feature guide description is displayed. The Feature guide turns off when you further proceed with any operation. • Shooting mode (Sample) P • Quick Control (Sample) Tv &VC oirg*Itl OW, Veer.% • Pyle, • tote IF miscue twig, ton we" Playback Shooting function Live View shooting Disabling the Feature Guide Select [Feature guide]. • Under the [So] tab, select [Feature guide], then press ce,.. Select (Disable), then press <e>. f— TT.L. FeM 48 EFTA01126245 Basic Shooting and Image Playback This chapter explains how to use the Basic Zone modes on the Mode Dial for best results and how to playback images. With Basic Zone modes, all you do is point and shoot and the camera sets everything automatically (p.64, 268). Also, to prevent botched pictures due to mistaken operations, major shooting settings cannot be changed in fully-automatic modes. Effl ( 514) About the Auto Lighting Optimizer In Basic Zone modes. the Auto ughung Optimizer (p.109) will adjust the image automatically to obtain the optimum brightness and contrast. It m also enabled by default in Creative Zone modes. EFTA01126246 G+ 0, Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) um The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings automatically. It Is a fully-automatic mode. Even with moving subjects, the camera will automatically continue to focus the subject (P-53). AF point Focus conkmation light 1i Set the Mode Dial to cat>. 2 Aim any AF point over the subject. • All the AF points will be used to focus, and generally the closest object will be focused. • Aiming the center AF point over the subject will make focusing easier. 3 Focus the subject. • Press the shutter button halfway, and the lens focusing ring will rotate to focus. Ito The dot inside the AF point achieving focus flashes briefly in red. At the same time, the beeper will sound and the focus confirmation light <•> in the viewfinder will light. Ito If necessary, the built in flash will pop- up automatically. 50 EFTA01126247 W Filly Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) 4 Take the picture. *c • Press the shutter button completely to take the picture. IP. The captured image will be displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the LCD monitor. • If the built-in flash has popped up, you can push it back down with your fingers. The cat <at> mode makes the colas look more impressive in nature. outdoor. and sunset scenes. If the desired color tone is not obtained, use a Creative Zone mode and select a suitable Picture Style (p.81). ? FAQ c. The focus confirmation light <•> blinks and focus is not achieved. Aim the AF point over an area having good contrast, then press the shutter* button halfway (p.40). If you are too close to the subject, move away and try again. • Sometimes multiple AF points flash simultaneously. This indicates that focus has been achieved at all those AF points. When the AF point covering the desired subject flashes. take the picture. • The beeper continues to beep softly. (The focus confirmation light <e> does not light.) It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving subject. (The focus confirmation light <0> does not light) You can take sham pictures of a moving subject. • Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus the subject. If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to <MF> (Manual Focus). set it to <AF> (Auto Focus). 51 EFTA01126248 W Fully Au%Caulk Moil/ling (Scene Intelligent Auto) • Although It is daylight, the flash popped up. For a backlit subject, the flash may pop up to help lighten the subject's dark areas. • In low light, the built-in flash fired a series of flashes. Pressing the shutter button halfway may trigger the built-in flash to fire a series of flashes to assist autofocusing. This is called AF-assist beam. Its effective range is about 4 meters/13.1 feet. • Although flash was used, the picture came out dark. The subject was too far away. The subject should be within 5 meters 16.4 feet from the camera. • When flash was used, the bottom part of the picture came out unnaturally dark. The subject was too close to the camera, and a shadow was created by the lens barrel. The subject should be at least 1 meter/3.3 feet away from the camera. If a hood has been attached to the lens, remove it before taking the flash picture. 52 EFTA01126249 at Full Auto (Scene Intelligent Auto) Techniques Recomposing the Shot Depending on the scene. position the subject toward the left or right to create a balanced background and good perspective. In the cat > (Scene Intelligent Auto) mode, while you press the shutter button halfway to focus a still subject, the focus will be locked. You can then recompose the shot and press the shutter button completely to take the picture. This is called "focus lock". Focus lock is also possible in other Basic Zone modes (except <ilk > Sports). Shooting a Moving Subject In the <13j> (Scene Intelligent Auto) mode. if the subject moves (distance to camera changes) during or after you focus, Al Servo AF will take effect to focus the subject continuously. As long as you keep aiming the AF point on the subject while pressing the shutter button halfway, the focusing will be continuous. When you want to take the picture, press the shutter button completely. 53 EFTA01126250 j Full Auto (Scene Intelligent Auto) Techniques IS Live View Shooting Live View shooting allows you to shoot while looking at the Image on the LCD monitor. For details. see page 123. y. I Display the Live View image on - -- the LCD monitor. r mI., 0.6 • Press the <0> button. 1 The Live View image will appear on e(3. r the LCD monitor. 2 Focus the subject. • Aim the center AF point <E> on the subject. • Press the shutter button halfway to focus. 1 When focus is achieved. the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound. Take the picture. • Press the shutter button completely. 1 The picture will be taken and the captured image is displayed on the LCD monitor. 1 After the Image review ends, the camera will return to Live View shooting automatically. • Press the <0> button to exit Live View shooting. You can also rotate the LCD monitor in different directions (p.31). Low angle 54 EFTA01126251 IS Disabling Flash In places where flash photography is prohibited, use the <ID> (Flash Off) mode. This mode is also effective for capturing the particular ambience of a scene, such as candlelight scenes. ir cm at 4:: Shooting Tips • Prevent camera shake if the numeric display In the viewfinder blinks. Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the viewfinder's shutter speed display will blink. Hold the camera steady or use a tripod. When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to reduce blur caused by camera shake. • Taking portraits without flash. In low-light conditions, tell the subject to keep still until the picture is taken. If the person moves during the exposure, he or she might look blurred in the picture. 55 EFTA01126252 0 Creative Auto Shooting Unlike the <I3 > Scene Intelligent Auto mode where the camera sets everything. the <Th), Creative Auto mode enables you to easily change the depth of field, drive mode, and flash firing. You can also choose the ambience you want to convey in your images. The default settings are the same as the <at mode. ' CA stands for Creative Auto. Set the Mode Dial to <El>. 2 Press the <O> button. (NO) ► The Quick Control screen will appear. Set the desired function. • Press the c kV > key to select a function. ► The selectee function and Feature guide (p.48) will be displayed. • For details on setting each function. see pages 57-58. 4 Take the picture. • Press the shutter button completely to take the picture. I.5] If you change the shooting mode or turn the power switch to <OFF>. the functions you have set on this screen will revert to their default setting. However, the self-Omer and remote control settings will be retained. 56 EFTA01126253 g GreatOve Auto Sheeting Shutter speed Aperture ISO speed Battery check Image-recording quality .(1) -(2) -(3) Possible shots Pressing the c( > button enables you to set the following: (1) Shoot by ambience selection You can set the ambience you want to convey in your images. Press the < •ele. > key or turn the <5> dial to select the desired ambience. You can also select it from a list by pressing ce>. For details, see page 65. (2) Blurring/sharpening the background 02, If you move the index mark toward the left, the background will look more blurred. If you move it toward the right, the background will look more in focus. If you want to blur the background, see "Shooting Portraits" on page 59. Press the < Ai> > key or turn the <S> dial to adjust it as desired. Depending on the lens and shooting conditions. the background might not look so blurred. This function cannot be set (grayed out) while the built-in flash is raised in the <Y> or <S> mode. If flash is used, this setting will not be applied. 57 EFTA01126254 al Creative Auto &toting (3) Drive mode/Flash firing Ottnt mole stn,ope goo:no.° O tql, 6..)c Patin ttnn; Auto Ono When you press <e>. the drive mode or flash firing setting screen will appear. Set as desired. then press <8> to finalize the setting and return to the Quick Control screen. Drive mode: Press the <40. > key or turn the cem > dial to set it as desired. <El> <9_J> Single shooting : Shoot one image at a time. Continuous shooting: While you hold down the shutter button completely, shots will be taken continuously. You can shoot up to about 3.7 shots per sec. <1J> $elf-timer:lOseclRemote control : The picture is taken 10 seconds after you press the shutter button. A remote control can also be used. <dk > Self-timer:Continuous : Press the <O> key to set the number of multiple shots (2 to 10) to be taken with the self-timer. 10 seconds after you press the shutter button, the set number of multiple shots will be taken. Flash firing: Press the <-4lie-> key or turn the <n> dial to set it as desired. <SA> Auto flash: The flash fires automatically when necessary. <S> Flash on : The flash fires at all times. < OS > Flash off : The flash is disabled. • When using ce> or < (c)c >. see the EV notes on page 89. • When using <CO,. see 'Disabling Flash' on page 55. 58 EFTA01126255 • Shooting Portraits The <0> (Portrait) mode blurs the background to make the human subject stand out. It also makes skin tones and the hair look softer. s. 514 t: Shooting Tips • The further the distance between the subject and background, the better. The further the distance between the subject and background. the more blurred the background will look. The subject will also stand out better in front of a plain. dark background. • Use a telephoto lens. If you have a zoom lens. use the telephoto end to fill the frame with the subject from the waist up. Move in closer if necessary. • Focus the face. Check that the AF point covering the face flashes in red. • If you hold down the shutter button. you can shoot continuously to obtain different poses and facial expressions. (max. approx. 3.7 shots/sec.) • If necessary. the built-in flash will pop up automatically. 59 EFTA01126256 ZA Shooting Landscapes Use the ea> (Landscape) mode for wide scenery, night scenes, of to have everything in focus from near to far. For vivid blues and greens. and very sharp and crisp images. lunLed rev 0•1•01 Seery O V me Il ( $141 jt Shooting Tips • With a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end. When using the wide-angle end of a zoom lens. objects near and far will be in focus better than at the telephoto end. It also adds breadth to landscapes. • Shooting night scenes. Since the built-in flash will be disabled, this mode <U> is also good for night scenes. Use a tripod to prevent camera shake. If you want to photograph a person against a night scene, set the Mode Dial to <IN> (Night Portrait) and use a tripod (p.63). 60 EFTA01126257 a Shooting Close-ups When you want to photograph flowers or small things up close, use the <4> (Close-up) mode. To make small things appear much larger, use a macro lens (sold separately). 4 Shooting Tips • Use a simple background. A simple background makes the flower. etc.. stand out better. • Move to the subject as close as possible. Check the lens for its minimum focusing distance. Some lenses have indications such as <•0.25m/0.8ft>. The lens minimum focusing distance is measured from the <e> (focal plane) mark on the top left of the camera to the subject. If you are too close to the subject. the focus confirmation light <•> vnll blink. Under low light. the built-in flash will fire. If you are too close to the subject and the bottom of the picture looks dark. move away from the subject. • With a zoom lens, use the telephoto end. If you have a zoom lens. using the telephoto end will make the subject look larger. 61 EFTA01126258 IL Shooting Moving Subjects To photograph a moving subject, whether It is a child running or a moving vehicle, use the <ft," (Sports) mode. W <#.. a. 514 : : Shooting Tips • Use a telephoto lens. Using a telephoto lens is recommended so you can shoot from afar. • Use the center AF point to focus. Aim the center AF point over the subject. then press the shutter button halfway to autofocus. During autofocusing, the beeper will continue beeping softly. If focus cannot be achieved. the focus confirmation light c•> will blink. When you want to take the picture, press the shutter button completely. If you hold down the shutter button, continuous shooting (max. approx. 3.7 shots per sec.) and autofocusing will take effect. 0 Under low light when camera shake is prone to occur, the viewfinders shutter speed display on the bottom left will blink. Hold the camera steady and shoot. 62 EFTA01126259 N Shooting Portraits at Night To shoot someone at night and obtain a natural-looking exposure in the background, use the <gi> (Night Portrait) mode. Shooting Tips • Use a wide-angle lens and a tripod. When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to obtain a wide night view. Also, use a tripod to prevent camera shake. • Keep the person within 5 meters/16.4 foot from the camera. Under low light, the built-in flash will fire automatically to obtain a good exposure of the person. The maximum effective distance of the built-in flash is 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera. • Shoot also with <a1> (Scene Intelligent Auto). Since camera shake is prone to occur with night shots, shooting also with <at > (Scene Intelligent Auto) is recommended. • Tell the sublect to keep still even after the flash fires. • If you use the self-timer together with flash. the self-timer lamp wad light briefly after the picture is taken. 63 EFTA01126260 g Quick Control Example: Portrait mode In Basic Zone modes when the shooting settings screen is displayed, you can press the <E1> button to display the Quick Control screen. The table below indicates the functions that can be set with the Quick Control screen in each Basic Zone mode. Set the Mode Dial to a Basic Zone mode. 2 Press the <ID> button. (NO) P. The Quick Control screen will appear. 3 Set the function. • Press the <At > key to select a function. (Step not necessary in the GST/Cia mode.) ► The selected function and Feature guide (p.48) will be displayed. • Press the <0> key or turn the <(A1> dial to change the setting. Settable Functions in Basic Zone Modes •: Set automatically 0: User selectable : Not selectable Function fiLf OSII CD Ossi ®0 losal IPA la Ikee) S 01) 'El 102) 0253) ONO made CI: Sumkt shooting 0 0 0 0 O .— SI: Co sinuous shooting 0 0 0 Sel( grow IS: 10 SeCiFteMele control 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 So: ConanueuS Wang aka 10 sec.' 00000000 Flesh firing ANCollatiC finny • 0 • • • FlaSh Oe IFireS at el Ines) 0 Flash off • 0 • • Shoal by sentience selecbon (p.66) 0 0 0 0 0 0 Shoos by ivory or scene type (PM) 0 0 0 0 BurrinWsharpenng the background 02.57) 0 'Use the <O> key to set the number of continuous shots. 64 EFTA01126261 Shoot by Ambience Selection Except in the <MT> (Scene Intelligent Auto) and <ED> (Flash Off) Basic Zone modes, you can select the ambience for shooting. Ambience it CD El S In E ilk E Ambience Effect (1) Standard setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 No scene (2) VIM 0 0 0 0 0 0 Low/ Stencterd / Strong (3) SON 0 0 0 0 0 0 Low/ Straw' / Strong (4)Warm 0 0 0 0 0 0 Low / Slandard / Strong (5) imam. 0 0 0 0 0 0 taws Steward / Strong lei Cod 0 0 0 0 0 0 Low/ Standard/ Strong (7) Boebtec 0 0 0 0 0 0 Low / Nleclum / H h (a)Dannir 0 0 0 0 0 0 Low/ Modum / High (5) 05000chWee 0 0 0 0 0 0 Blue/15W /Sege 1 Set the Mode Dial to any of the following modes: <IM>, <0>, iczn ,<5>,<.0„.> or <gi>. 2 Display the Live View image. • With the Live View image displayed, you can see the ambience effect. • Press the <0> button to switch to Live View shooting. On the Quick Control screen, select the desired ambience. • Press the <ID> button (Noy • Press the <0, key to select [Standard setting]. [Shoot by ambience selection] will appear on the screen's bottom. • Press the <4i., key or tum the dial to select the desired ambience. IP. The LCD monitor will show how the image will look with the selected ambience. 65 EFTA01126262 Sheet by Ambience Selection 4 Set the ambience effect. • Press the <AT> key to select the effect bar so that (Effect( appears at the bottom. • Press the <0 > key or turn the <S> dial to select the desired effect. 5 Take the picture. • To shoot while the Live View image is displayed, press the shutter button. • To return to viewfinder shooting, press the <O> button to exit Live View shooting. Then press the shutter button completely to take the picture. • If you change the shooting mode or set the power switch to <0FF>, the setting will revert back to (Standard setting). • The Live View image shown with the ambience setting applied will not look exactly the same as the actual photo. • Using flash may minimize the ambience effect. e In bright outdoors. the Live View image you see on the screen might not have exactly the same brightness cc ambience as the actual photo. Set (fo LCD brightness) to 4 and look at the Live View image while the screen is unaffected by stray kght. If you don't want the Live View rnage to be displayed when sarong functions. press the <O> button alter step 1. When you press the <O> button. the Quick Control screen is displayed and you can set (Shoot by ambience selection] and (Shoot by lighting or scene). then shoot with the viewfinder. 66 EFTA01126263 Shoot by Ambience Selection Ambience Settings (1) setting Standard image characteristics for the respective shooting mode. Note that <0> has image characteristics geared for portraits and ea> is geared for landscapes. Each ambience is a modification of the respective shooting mode's image characteristics. (2)1/IvId The subject will look sharp and vivid. It makes the photo look more impressive than with (Standard setting). (3) Soft The subject will look softer and more dainty. Good for portraits, pets. flowers. etc. (4)Warm The subject will look softer with warmer colors. Good for portraits. pets, and other subjects to which you want to give a warm look. (5) Intense While the overall brightness is slightly lowered, the subject is emphasized for a more intense feeling. Makes the human or living subject stand out more. (6) Cool The overall brightness is slightly lowered with a cooler color cast. A subject in the shade will look more calm and Impressive. (7) Brighter The picture will look brighter. (B) Darker The picture will look darker. (9) Monochrome The picture will be monochrome. You can select the monochrome color to be black and white, sepia. or blue. When [Monochrome) Is selected. <BIW> will appear in the viewfinder. 67 EFTA01126264 Shoot by Lighting or Scene Type In the clit> (Portrait), <k> (Landscape), <a> (Close-up), and cilik> (Sports) Basic Zone modes, you can shoot while the settings match the lighting or scene type. Normally, [Default setting) is adequate, but if the settings match the lighting condition or scene, the picture will look more accurate to your eye. For Live View sheeting. if you set both [Shoot by lighting or scene type) and (Shoot by ambience selection) (p.65), you should first set [Shoot by lighting or scene type). This will make it easier to see the resulting effect on the LCD monitor. Lighting or scene G CD Cil 9 Is & 'IS. IS II) Default senirc O O O O I 2) DaYbON O O O O I3) Shoe O O O O (4) Cloudy O O O O O) Tungsten light O O O 16) Rico/scent Ight O O O (7) Swiset O O O O Set the Mode Dia to any of the following modes <Ø>, ca>, <a>, or <t`>, 2 Display the Live View image. • With the Live View image displayed. you can see the resulting effect. • Press the <es> button to switch to Live View shooting. 68 EFTA01126265 Shoot by Lighting or Some Type C__Dea,ft WW1. Shanty es lane new 3 On the Quick Control screen, select the lighting or scene type. • Press the ca l> button (610). • Press the <O> key to select [Default setting) (shown in the sample screen). [Shoot by lighting or scene type) will appear on the screen's bottom. • Press the <AP.> key or turn the <es> dial to select the desired lighting or scene type. • The LCD monitor will show how the image will look with the selected lighting or scene type. 4 Take the picture. • To shoot while the Live View image is displayed, press the shuts button. • To return to viewfinder shooting. press the ceg, button to exit Live View shooting. Then press the shutter button completely to take the picture. • If you change the shooting mode or set the power switch to <OFF>, the setting will revert back to (Default setting). • If you use flash. the setting will switch to (Default setting). (However, the shooting information will display the lighting or scene type that was set.) • If you want to set this together with (Shoot by ambience selection). set the (Shoot by lighting or scene type) which best matches the ambience you have set. In the case of (Sunset) for example. warm colors become prominent so the ambience you set night not work well. rtip If you don't want the Uve View image to be displayed when setting functions. press the <ffi, button after step 1. Pressing the <C I> button will display the Quick Control screen. You can then set (Shoot by lighting or scene type) and shoot with the viewfinder. 69 EFTA01126266 Shoot by Ughleig Or Scene Type Lighting or Scene Type Settings (1) Default setting The default setting. (2) Daylight For subjects under sunlight. Gives more natural-looking blue skies and greenery and reproduces light-colored flowers better*. (3)Shade For subjects in the shade. Suitable for skin tones. which may look too bluish. and for light-colored flowers. (4)Cloudy For subjects under overcast skies. Makes skin tones and landscapes. which may otherwise look dull on a cloudy day. look warmer. Also effective for light-colored flowers. (5)Tungsten light For subjects lit under tungsten lighting. Reduces the reddish-orange color cast caused by tungsten lighting. (6) Fluorescent light For subjects under fluorescent lighting. Suited for all types of fluorescent lighting. (7)Sunset Suitable when you want to capture the sunset's impressive colors. 70 EFTA01126267 E Image Playback The easiest way to playback images is explained below. For more details on the playback procedure, see page 201. Playback the image. • When you press the <0> button, the last image captured will be displayed. 2 Select an image. • To view images starling with the last image, press the <.> key. To view images starting with the first (oldest) image, press the <►> key. • Each time you press the <INFO.> button, the display format will change. No information Histogram With basic information r icr Shooting information display 3 Exit the image playback. • Press the <ID, button to exit the image playback and return to the shooting settings display. 71 EFTA01126268 EFTA01126269 3 Creative Shooting In the Basic Zone modes, to prevent spoiled shots, most functions are set automatically and cannot be changed. In the <P> (Program AE) mode, you can set various functions and be more creative. • In the <P> mode, the camera sets the shutter speed and aperture automatically to obtain a standard exposure. • The difference between the Basic Zone modes and <P> is explained on page 268. • The functions explained in this chapter can also be used in the <Tv >. <Av>. and <M> modes explained in Chapter 4. • The * mark shown on the right of the page title indicates that the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (p.22). ' <P> stands for Program. ' AE stands for Auto Exposure. EFTA01126270 P: Program AE The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit the subject's brightness. This is called Program AE. CET =Glat 1 Set the Mode Dial to <p>. 2 Focus the subject. • Look through the viewfinder and aim the selected AF point over the subject. Then press the shutter button halfway. IP. The dot inside the AF point achieving focus lights briefly in red, and the focus confirmation light <111, in the viewfinder's bottom right lights (with One Shot AF). ► The shutter speed and aperture will be set automatically and displayed in the viewfinder. Check the display. • A standard exposure will be obtained as long as the shutter speed and aperture display do not blink. 4 Take the picture. • Compose the shot and press the shutter button completely. 74 EFTA01126271 P:PfOgraMAE 47: Shooting Tips • Change the ISO speed or use the built-In flash. To match the subject and ambient lighting level, you can change the ISO speed (p.79) or use the built-in flash (p.90). In the <P> mode, the built-in flash will not fire automatically. So under low light. press the <S> (Flash) button to raise the built-in flash. • The program can be shifted. (Program shift) After pressing the shutter button halfway. turn the <s> dial to change the shutter speed and aperture setting combination (program). Program shift is canceled automatically after the picture is taken. Program shift is not possible with flash. 0 • It the •30“" shutter speed and the maximum aperture blink, it indicates underexposure. Increase the ISO speed or use flash. • If the '4000' shutter speed and the minimum aperture blink, it indicates overexposure. Decrease the ISO speed. Differences Between <P> and <ir> (Scene Intelligent Auto) With <at >. many functions such the AF mode. drive mode, and built-in flash are set automatically to prevent sealed shots. The functions you can set are limited. With <P>. only the shutter speed and aperture are set automatically. You can freely set the AF mode. drive mode. budt-in flash. and other functions (p.268). 75 EFTA01126272 OM Setting the Image-recording Quality • You can select the pixel count and the image quality. Ten image- recording quality settings are provided: A L, AL. AM. AM. A 51. AS1. S2. 53. CISB. ®+I L. i;1 s. imp Inaba, :Anse flMhr wittoa card ', tat rem, 2sec Pixel count IL it. IM IM ISt isi Si Si tirhal = Select [Quality]. • Under the [On tab, select [Quality), then press <S>. ► [Quality] will appear. 2 Select the image-recording Possible shots quality. • The respective quality's pixel count and number of possible shots will be displayed to help you select the desired quality. Then press cei>. Guide to Image-recording Quality Settings (Approx.) IL AL AM AM 551 551 Quality High quality Medium quality 52 53 Low quality JPEG Pixels Recorded' File Size' Possible - Maximum (megapixels) (MB) Shots Burst Approx. 17.9 6.4 570 (18M) Approx. 8.0 (8M) Approx. 4.5 (4.5M) Approx. 2.5 (2.5M) Approx. 0.35 (0.35M) ®+5L High quality (18M) 24.5+6.4 110 3 Approx. 17.9 34 3.2 1120 1120 3.4 1070 1070 1.7 2100 2100 2.2 1670 1670 1.1 3180 3180 1.3 2780 2780 0.3 10780 10780 24.5 150 6 • Figure. for the Me size, number of MOMS* slats. and maximum burst are based on canon's 4GB test card and testing slandards (3.2 aspect rats). ISO 100. and Standard Picture Style). These figures will vary depending on the subject, card brand. aspect ratio. ISO speed. Picture Style. Custom Functions, and other settings. 76 EFTA01126273 03E Setting the Image.recor6ng OU8lity FAQ • I want to select the Image-recording quality matching the paper size for printing. Paper size A2 (02x59.0crn/16.5z23Aln.) IL A3 42x29.7an IL 16.5x11.710 OM ASI St •A AM AM AO (29.7Atlanit7x8.31n. 12.7x8.9enV5.0x3.5m • What's the difference between A and I? It indicates a different image quality due to a different compression rate. Even with the same number of pixels, the I image has higher image quality. If I is selected, the image quality will be slightly lower, but more images can be saved to the card. Both S2 and 53 have A (Fine) quality. • I could take more shots than the number of possible shots Indicated. Depending on the shooting conditions, you may be able to take more shots than was indicated. It might also be fewer than indicated. The number of possible shots displayed is only approximate. • Does the camera display the maximum burst? The maximum burst is displayed in the viewfinder's right side. Since it is only a single-digit indicator 0 - 9. any number higher than 9 will be displayed only as "9.* Note that this number will also be displayed even when no card is installed in the camera. Be careful not to shoot without a card in the camera. • When should I use C? CM images require processing with your computer. For details, see "About WM" and "About OE +IL' on the next page. Refer to the diagram on the left when choosing the image-recording quality. If you want to crop the image, selecting a higher quality (more pixels) such as A L, IL. C. or CEM + AL is recommended. S2 is suitable for playing the images on a digital photo frame. $3 is suitable for emailing the image or using it on a Web site. 77 EFTA01126274 ere Setting the linage-recording amity About OE GM is the raw image data before it is made into IL or other images. Although CEMI images require software like Digital Photo Professional (provided, p.302) so they can be displayed on the computer, they also offer flexibility for image adjustments possible only with I . MI is effective when you want to precisely adjust the image yourself or shoot an important subject. About ®+I L au +IL records both a aza and A L image with a single shot. The two images are saved to the card simultaneously. The two images will be saved in the same folder with the same file numbers file extension .JPG for JPEG and .CR2 for RAW). IL images can be viewed or printed even with a computer which does not have the software provided with the camera installed. 1 000 • ®imago II.I° 1 . CR2 IL image I. 0001 . JPG File numberJ File extension Commercially-available software might not be able to display RAW images. Using the provided software is recommended. 78 EFTA01126275 ISO: Changing the ISO Speed* Set the ISO speed (image sensor's sensitivity to light) to suit the ambient light level. In Basic Zone modes, the ISO speed is set automatically (p.80). : • ): KO <I, ISO Speed Guide ISO Speed Shooting Situation (No Rash) Flash Range 100 - 400 Sunny outdoors The hgher the ISO speed. the farther the flash range wi extend (p.90). 400 - 1600 Overcast skies or evening time 1600 - 6400. H Dark indoors or night • High ISO speeds wit result in grainier images. Press the <IS0> button. (66) ► (ISO speed) will appear. 2 Set the ISO speed. • Press the c.d.- > key or tum the <s> dial to select the desired ISO speed, then press <8,.. • You can also set the ISO speed in the viewfinder while turning the <a> dial. • With [AUTO] selected. the ISO speed will be set automatically (p.80). Under (gi Custom Functions (C.Fn)). if [2: ISO expansion) is set to (1: On). 11' (equivalent to ISO 12800) can also be set (p.252). O e Under (gi Custom Functions (C.Fn)). if (6: Highlight tone priority) is set to (1: Enable). ISO 100 and (equivalent to ISO 12800) cannot be selected (p.254). • Shooting in high temperatures may result in images that look grainier. Long exposures can also cause irregular odors in the trnage. • When you shoot at high ISO speeds. noise (banding. dots of light. etc.) may become noticeable. 79 EFTA01126276 ISO: Changing the ISO speed ' ISO [AUTO] Ni sone< Auto • AuTo ICC ;9: yr. '10: 17tC 1,4:0 If the ISO speed is set to (AUTO), the actual ISO speed to be set will be displayed when you press the shutter button halfway. As Indicated below the ISO speed will be set automatically to suit the shooting mode. Shooting Mode ISO Speed Setting ILi /CD Agit' /S/0.,/Pi Automatically set within ISO 100 - 3200 Pay/ AWM•VA-DEP Automatically set within ISO 100 - 6400-2 1 — Fixed at ISO 100 With flash fixed at ISO 400*3-4 ' 1: Fixed at ISO 400 for bulb exposures. '2: Depends on the maximum ISO speed limit set. ' 3: If fill flash results in overexposure. ISO 100 or a higher ISO speed will be set. '4: If bounce flash is used with an external Speedlite in a Basic Zone (except cly,) mode. < p> or <A-DEP, mode. ISO 400 - 1600 (or up to the maximum limit) will be set automatic*. 41. • When (AUTO) is set. the ISO speed is indicated n whole-stop ncrements. However, the ISO speed is actualy set in finer ncrements. Therefore. in the image's shooting information (p.226). you may find an ISO speed like 125 or 640 displayed as the ISO speed. • In the <0, mode. the ISO speed shown n the table is actualy used even if ISO 100 is not displayed. nip Setting the Maximum ISO Speed for ISO Auto * For ISO Auto, you can set the maximum ISO speed limit within ISO 400 - 6400. n M.0 0,4:0 Under the 01 tab, select [ISO Auto), then press <0›. Select the ISO speed, then press <8›. 80 EFTA01126277 at:r. Selecting the Subject's Optimal Image Characteristics * By selecting a Picture Style. you can obtain Image characteristics matching your photographic expression or the subject. In Basic Zone modes, you cannot select the Picture Style. a. 514 Auto C ‘ 11 C: r C gal e'7, ) er, ail ED ER Co atms. etuicx Press the <V Z:-> button. Ir. (Picture Style) will appear. Select a Picture Style. • Press the <0-> key or turn the <n> dial to select a Picture Style. then press <e>. Picture Style Characteristics E Auto The color tone will be adjusted to suit the scene. The colors will look vivid. especially for blue skies. greenery. and sunsets in nature. outdoor. and sunset scenes. if the desred color tone is not obtained. use another Picture Style. C31 Standard The image looks vivid. sharp. and crisp. This is a general-purpose Picture Style suitable for most scenes. Deu Portrait For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Good for dose-up portraits. By changing the (Color tone) (p.113). you can adjust the skin tone. 81 EFTA01126278 .3:s. Selecting the Subject's °pullet Image Characteristics 0 Landscape For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images. Effective for impressive landscapes. Eli Neutral This Picture Style is for users wtto prefer to process images with their computer. For natural colors and subdued images. 0 Faithful This Picture Style is for users who prefer to process images with their computer. When the subject is captured under a color temperature of 5200K. the color is adjusted cokximetrically to match the subject's color. The image looks dull and subdued. I—A Monochrome Creates black-and-white images. Other than with MM. the black-and-vihde rnage cannot be reverted to color. If you want to later shoot pictures in color, make sure the [Monochrome) setting has been canceled. When (Monochrome] is set. <B/W> will appear in the viewfinder. User Def. 1-3 You can register a basic style such as [Portrait), (Landscape]. a Picture Style file, etc., and adjust it as desired (p.115). Any User Defined Picture Style which has not been set will have the same default settings as the [Auto) Picture Style. 82 EFTA01126279 AF: Changing the Autofocus Mode * You can select the AF (autofocus) mode to suit the shooting conditions or subject. In Basic Zone modes, the most suitable AF mode is set automatically. 1 On the lens, set the focus mode switch to <AF>. 2 Press the e AF> button. ► [AF model will appear. Select the AF mode. Press the <AP.> key or turn the <n> dial to select the desired AF mode, then press <e>. 4 Focus the subject. • Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway. The camera will then autofocus in the selected AF mode. One-Shot AF for Still Subjects Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus only once. • When focus is achieved, the dot inside the AF point achieving focus lights briefly in red, and the focus confirmation light <•> in the viewfinder will also light. • With evaluative metering (p.102). the exposure setting will be set at the same time focus is achieved. • While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired. 83 EFTA01126280 AF. Changing the Au!Oxus Mode ° ty • If focus cannot be achieved. the focus confirmation light <•, in the viewfinder will blink. If this occurs. a picture cannot be taken even if the shutter button is pressed completely. Recompose the picture and try to focus again. Or see 'Subjects Difficult to Focus' (p.87). • If (Cr Beep) is set to (Disable), the beeper will not sound when focus is achieved. Al Servo AF for Moving Subjects This AF mode Is for moving subjects when the focusing distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the subject will be focused continuously. • The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken. • When the AF point selection (p.85) is automatic. the camera first uses the center AF point to focus. During autofocusing. if the subject moves away from the center AF point. focus tracking continues as long as the subject is covered by another AF point. With Al Servo AF. the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved. Also. the focus confirmation light <•, in the viewfinder will not light. Al Focus AF for Automatic Switching of AF Mode Al Focus AF switches the AF mode from One-Shot AF to Al Servo AF automatically if the still subject starts moving. • After the subject is focused in One-Shot AF mode. if the subject starts moving. the camera will detect the movement and change the AF mode automatically to Al Servo AF. When focus is achieved in the Al Focus AF mode with the Servo mode active. the beeper wM sound continuously sofItly. However. the focus confirmation fight <•> in the viewfinder will not fight. 84 EFTA01126281 Selecting the AF Point * In Basic Zone modes, the camera will normally focus the closest subject automatically. Therefore, it might not always focus your target subject. In the <p>, <Tv>. <Av>, and <M> modes, you can select the AF point and use it to focus the target subject. Press the < CIO > button. (66) • The selected AF point will be displayed on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder. 2 Select the AF point. • Press the <.y> key to select the AF point. • While looking at the viewfinder, you can select the AF point by turning the <s> dial until the desired AF point lights in red. • When all the AF points light up, automatic AF point selection will be set. The AF point will be selected automatically to focus the subject. • Pressing <9> toggles the AF point selection between the center AF point and automatic AF point selection. 3 Focus the subject. • Aim the selected AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway to focus. 85 EFTA01126282 CB Selecting the AF POInt • ikk: Shooting Tips • When shooting a portrait up close, use One-Shot AF and focus the eyes. If you focus the eyes first, you can then recompose and the face will remain sharp. • If it is difficult to focus, select and use the center AF point. The center AF point is the most sensitive among the nine AF points. • To make it easier to focus a moving subject, set the camera to automatic AF point selection and Al Servo AF (p.84). The center AF point will first be used to focus the subject. During autofocusing. if the subject moves away from the center AF point. focus tracking continues as long as the subject is covered by another AF point. AF-Assist Beam with the Built-in Flash Under low-light oonditions, when you press the shutter button halfway. the built-in gash fires a brief burst of flashes. It illuminates the subject to enable easier autofocusing. ly • The AF-assist beam will not be fired in the following shooting modes: <s>. <y> and oftt.,>. • The AF-assist beam cannot be emitted in the Al Servo AF mode. • The effective range of the AF-assist beam emitted by the built-in flash is about 4 meters/13.1 feet. • In Creative Zone modes when you raise the butt-in flash with the < button (p.90). the AF-assist beam will be fired when necessary. If you use an Extender (sold separately) and the maximum aperture becomes smaller than f/5.6. AF shooting will not be possible (except in (Live mode) and (1.." Live mode) during Live View shooting). For details. see the Extender's instruction manual. 86 EFTA01126283 Subjects Difficult to Focus Autofocus can fail to achieve focus (viewfinder's focus confirmation light <•> blinks) with certain subjects such as the following: • Very low-contrast subjects. (Example: Blue sky. solid-color walls. etc.) • Subjects in very low light • Extremely backlit or reflective subjects (Example: Car with a highly reflective body. etc.) • Near and far subjects covered by an AF point (Example: Animal in a cage. etc.) • Repetitive patterns (Example: Skyscraper windows. computer keyboards. etc.) In such cases. do one of the following: (1)With One-Shot AF, focus an object at the same distance as the subject and lock the focus before recomposing (p.53). (2)Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> and focus manually. [i] For condibons where AF can fail to achieve focus with (Live modeMI Live model during Live View shooting, see page 134. MF: Manual Focusing N AI Mnit" Focusing ring Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF>. Focus the subject. • Focus by turning the lens focusing ring until the subject looks sharp in the viewfinder. if you hold down the shutter button halfway during manual focusing, the AF point achieving focus will light in red briefly. the beeper will sound. and the focus confirmation light <0> M the viewfinder will light 87 EFTA01126284 oar Continuous Shooting* You can shoot up to about 3.7 shots per sec. This is effective for shooting a child running toward you or capturing different facial expressions. cl l ,it 'Si 'Sc I a ite Shooting Tips • Also set the AF mode (p.83) matching the subject. • For a moving subject When Al Servo AF is set, focusing will be continuous during continuous shooting. • For still subjects When One-Shot AF is set, the camera will focus only once during continuous shooting. • Flash can also be used. Since the gash will require recycling time, the continuous shooting speed will be slower. 0 • Under (el Custom Functions (C.Fn)). if (5: High ISO speed noise reduction] (p.25.4) is set to (2: Strong]. the maximum continuous shooting burst will greatly decrease. • In Al Servo AF mode. the continuous shooting speed may become slightly slower depending on the subject and the lens used. • The continuous shooting speed might also decrease indoors and under low light I Press the <4a icii> button. 2 Select clai>. • Press the c 4►> key or turn the cS> dial to select continuous shooting <lap. then press ce>. 3 Take the picture. • The camera shoots continuously while you hold down the shutter button completely. 88 EFTA01126285 Using the Self-timer I Press the <4 la ;s> button. 2 Select the self-timer. • Press the < 40, > key or tom the <e l > dial to select the desired self- timer. then press <e>. is: 10-see. self-timer The remote control can also be used. (p.261) 2 : 2-see. self-timer' (p.122) ac : 10-see. self-timer plus continuous shots Press the <0> key to set the • meter of continuous shots (2 to 10) lo be taken with the sell-timer. 3 Take the picture. • Look through the viewfinder. focus the subject, then press the shutter button completely. • You can check the self-timer operation with the self-timer lamp. beeper, and countdown display (in seconds) on the LCD monitor. • Two seconds before the picture is taken, the self-timer lamp will stay on and the beeper will sound faster. 0 With <Sc>, the interval between the multiple shots may be prolonged decencirg on the shooing fenders settings such as the image-recordng quality or flesh. • Met takrg sel-trrer silo's. you staid check the image for prow focus arc, exposure (p.71). • If you will not look through the viewfrider when you press the shutter button. attach the eyepiece cover (p.262). If stray light enters the viewfinder when the pectins is taken. it may throw off the exposure. • When using the self-timer to shoot only yourself, use focus lock (p.53) on an object at about the same distance as where you will stand. • To cancel the self-timer after it starts. press the <ilia idi> button. To cancel the self-timer Owing Live View shooting. set the power switch to <OFF>. 89 EFTA01126286 Using the Built-in Flash In indoors. low light, or backlit conditions in daylight, just raise the built- in flash and press the shutter button to take flash pictures. In the <P> mode, the shutter speed (1/60 sec. - 11200 sec.) will be set automatically to prevent camera shake. 0 QS arr." C Press the <i> button. • In Creative Zone modes, you can press the <S> button anytime to take flash pictures. • While the flash is recycling, sibuSr is displayed in the viewfinder, and [BUSY$) is displayed on the LCD monitor. 2 Press the shutter button halfway. • In the bottom left of the viewfinder, check that the <y> icon is lit. 3 Take the picture. • When focus is achieved and you press the shutter button completely, the flash will fire for the picture. Effective Flash Range ISO speed (p.79) EF-S18-55com f/3.5-5.6 IS II EF-518-135mm 03.5-5.6 IS Wide Angle Telephoto 100 1 - 3.7/3.3 - 12.1 1 - 2.3/3.3 - 7.5 200 1-5.3/3.3-17A 1 - 3.3/3.3 - 10.8 400/AUTO' 1 -7.413.3 - 24.3 1 -4.613.3 - 15.1 800 1 - 10.51 3.3 - 34.4 1 -8.613.3 - 212 1600 1 - 14.91 3.3 - 48.9 1 - 9.3 13.3 - 30.5 3200 1 - 21.013.3 - 66.9 1 -13.113.3-43.0 6400 1 - 29.713.3 - 97.4 1 -18.613.3-61.0 11: 12800 1 -42.0 /3.3 - 137.8 1 -26.313.3-86.3 [Approx. in meters/feet ' For flesh. the ISO speed might be set lower than ISO 400. 90 EFTA01126287 $ Using the 11-in Flash :4 Shooting Tips • If the subject Is far away, Increase the ISO speed (p.79). By Increasing the ISO speed, you can extend the flash range. • In bright light, decrease the ISO speed. If the exposure setting in the viewfinder blinks, decrease the ISO speed. • Detach the lens hood and keep at least 1 meted3.3 feet away from the subject If the lens has a hood attached or you are too close to the subject, the bottom of the picture might look dark due to the obstructed flash. For important shots, check the image on the LCD monitor to make sure the flash exposure looks natural (not dark at the bottom). 011393 Red-eye Reduction Using the red-eye reduction lamp before taking a flash picture can reduce red eye. Red-eye reduction will work in any shooting mode except <l9>, ca>, ct>, or CM>. • Under the [C11 tab, select (Red-eye reduc.I. then press <e>. Select [Enable]. then press co>. • For flash photography, when you press the shutter button halfway, the red-eye reduction lamp will light. Then when you press the shutter button completely. the picture will be taken. • The red-eye reduction feature is most effective when the subject looks at the red-eye reduction lamp, when the room is well kt. or when you are close to the subject. • When you press the shutter button halfway, the scale display on the bottom of the viewfinder will shrink and turn off. For best results. take the picture after this scale display turns off. • The effectiveness of red-eye reduction varies depending on the subject. as IIIIIIIIIIII 91 EFTA01126288 EFTA01126289 da. Advanced Shooting This chapter builds on Chapter 3 and introduces more ways to shoot creatively. • The first half of this chapter explains how to use the <Tv>. <Av>. <M>. and <A•DEP> modes on the Mode Dial. • All the functions explained in Chapter 3 can also be used in the <Tv>. <Ay>. and <M> modes. • To see which functions can be used in each shooting mode, see page 268. • The * mark shown on the right of the page title indicates that the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (p.22). YM About the Main Dial Pointer The pointer icon <Pal> displayed together with the shutter* speed. aperture setting, or exposure compensation amount indicates that you can tum the csict15> dial to adjust the respective setting. 11115 EFTA01126290 Tv: Action Shots You can either freeze the action or create motion blur with the <Tv> (Shutter-priority AE) mode on the Mode Dial. '<Tv, stands for Tme value. Blurred motion Frozen acbon (Slow shutter speed: 1/30 sec.) (Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.) 1 Set the Mode Dial to <Tv>. c r 6 1 12 Sttn.. ittrin't'"" C' S• Set the desired shutter speed. • See 'Shooting Tips' for advice on setting the shutter speed. • Turning the <n> dial to the right sets a faster shutter speed, and turning it to the left sets a slower one. Take the picture. • When you focus and press the shutter button completely. the picture will be taken at the selected shutter speed. Shutter Speed Display The LCD monitor displays the shutter speed as a fraction. However. the viewfinder displays only the denominator. Also. -0"5" indicates 0.5 sec. and •15*" is 15 sec. 94 EFTA01126291 Tv: Action Shots V7: Shooting Tips • To freeze the action or moving subject. Use a fast shutter speed such as 1/4000 sec. to 1/500 sec. • To blur a running child or animal giving the impression of fast movement. Use a medium shutter speed such as 1/250 sec. to 1/30 sec. Follow the moving subject through the viewfinder and press the shutter button to take the picture. If you use a telephoto lens. hold it steady to prevent camera shake. • How to blur a flowing river or water fountain. Use a slow shutter speed of 1/30 sec. or slower. Use a tripod to prevent hand-held camera shake. • Set the shutter speed so that the aperture display does not blink. If you press the shutter button halfway and change the shutter speed while the aperture is displayed. EON the aperture display will also change to maintain the same exposure (amount of light reaching the image sensor). If you exceed the adjustable aperture range, the aperture display will blink to indicate that the standard exposure cannot be obtained. If the exposure will be too dark. the maximum aperture (smallest number) will blink. If this happens. turn the <els> dial to the left to set a slower shutter speed or increase the ISO speed. If the exposure will be too bright. the minimum aperture (highest number) will blink. If this happens. turn the <n> dial to the right to set a faster shutter speed or decrease the ISO speed. S Using the Buih•in Flash To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set automatically (autoflash exposure) to match the automatically-set aperture. The flash sync speed can be set from 1/200 sec. to 30 sec. 95 EFTA01126292 lE.'-'1" 1" 'C S. Av: Changing the Depth of Field To blur the background or to make everything near and far look sharp, set the Mode Dial to <Av> (Aperture-priority AE) to adjust the depth of field (range of acceptable focus). • <Air> stands for Aperture value which is the size of the diaphragm hole inside the lens. Blurred background Sharp foreground and background (With a low aperture (Mutter: (5.6) (With a high aperture (?number. f./32) I Set the Mode Dial to i< Av>. i„si. 2 Set the desired aperture. • The higher the (number, the wider ..- the depth of field where sharper focus is obtained in both the foreground and background. • Turning the <n› dial to the right will set a higher f/number (smaller aperture opening), and turning it to the left will set a lower f/number (larger aperture opening). Take the picture. • Focus and press the shutter button completely. The picture will be taken with the selected aperture. Aperture Display The higher the f/number. the smaller the aperture opening wdl be. The apertu'es displayed will cider depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to the camera. '00' will be displayed for the aperture. 96 EFTA01126293 Av, Changing the Depth of Fiala aft Shooting Tips • When using an aperture with a high f/number, note that camera shake can occur in low light scenes. A higher aperture (/number will make the shutter speed slower. Under low light, the shutter speed can be as long as 30 sec. In such cases, increase the ISO speed and hold the camera steady or use a tripod. • The depth of field depends not only on the aperture, but also on the lens and on the subject distance. Since wide-angle lenses have a wide depth of field (range of acceptable focus in front of and behind the point of focus), you need not set a high aperture finumber to obtain a sharp picture from the foreground to the background. On the other hand, a telephoto lens has a narrow depth of field. And the closer the subject, the narrower the depth of field. A farther subject will have a wider depth of field. • Set the aperture so that the shutter speed display does not blink. If you press the shutter button halfway and change the aperture while the shutter speed is displayed. la the shutter speed display will also change to maintain the same exposure (amount of light reaching the image sensor). If you exceed the adjustable shutter speed range, the shutter speed display will blink to indicate that the standard exposure cannot be obtained. If the picture will be too dark, the '30"" (30 sec.) shutter speed display will blink. If this happens, tum the <a> dial to the left to set a lower aperture finumber or increase the ISO speed. If the picture will be too bright, the "4000' (114000 sec.) shutter speed display will blink. If this happens, turn the </(i> dial to the tight to set a higher aperture (!number or decrease the ISO speed. 97 EFTA01126294 Av Changing the Depth of Field $ Using the Built-in Flash To obtain a correct flash exposure. the flash output will be set automatically to match the set aperture (auto0ash exposure). The shutter speed will be set automatically between 1/200 sec. - 30 sec. to suit the scene's brightness. In low light, the main subject Is exposed with the automatic flash, and the background is exposed with a slow shutter speed set automatically. Both the subject and background look properly exposed (automatic slow-speed flash sync). If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera shake. Using a tripod is recommended. If you do not want a slow shutter speed to be used, set [3: Flash sync. speed in Av mode) to [1: 11200.1160 sec. auto) or [2: 1/200 sec. (fixed)) in [9`• Custom Functions (C.Fn)) (p.252). Depth of Field Preview* The aperture opening (diaphragm) changes only at the moment when the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open. Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or LCD monitor, he depth of field will look narrow. When you press the depth-of-field preview button, you can see the actual depth of field before you shoot. While looking at the Live View image (p.120) and holding down the depth-of- field preview button. you can change the aperture and see how the depth of field changes. 98 EFTA01126295 M: Manual Exposure You can set both the shutter speed and aperture manually as desired. While referring to the exposure level indicator in the viewfinder, you can set the exposure as desired. This method is called manual exposure. • <M> stands for Manual. 2 3 4 MI- MOO f6.3 61400 Standard exposure index ru0 6.3' ° D'"" 9* Exposure level mark Set the Mode Dial to <M>. Set the shutter speed and aperture. • To set the shutter speed, turn the ce,'s > dial. • To set the aperture. hold down the <Avail> button and turn the </, '‘i> dial. Focus the subject. • Press the shutter button halfway. Po The exposure setting will be displayed in the viewfinder. • The exposure level mark <I> indicates how far the current exposure level is from the standard exposure level. Set the exposure and take the picture. • Set the shutter speed and aperture as desired. • If the exposure set exceeds 1.2 stops from the standard exposure. the end of the exposure level indicator will display < 4 > or <I> in the viewfinder. (On the LCD monitor. if the exposure level exceeds ±3 stops, the <a> icon will bank at where <-3> or <+3> is displayed.) 4-1 if (0' Auto Lighting Optimizer) (p.109) is set to any setting alter than (Disable). the image may still look bright even if a darker exposure has been set. 99 EFTA01126296 M: Manual Exposure Using the Built-in Flash To obtain a correct flash exposure. the flash output will be set automatically (autoflash exposure) to match the manually-set aperture. The flash sync speed can be set from 1/200 sec. to 30 sec. and bulb. BULB: Bulb Exposures M F AE A bulb exposure keeps the shutter open for as long as you hold down the shutter button. It can be used to photograph fireworks. etc. In step 2 on the preceding page. turn the <ier> dial to the left to set <BULB>. The elapsed exposure time will be displayed on the LCD monitor. • During the bulb exposure, do not porn the lens toward the sun. The sun's heat can damage the camera's internal components. • Since bulb exposures produce more noise than usual, the image might look a litge • You can reduce the noise due to long exposures by setting (4: Long exp. noise reduction) to (1: Auto) or (2: On) n the Custom Functions (C.Fn)) (p.253). Q • For bulb exposures. using a bicood and Remote Switch (sold separately. p.262) is recommended. • You can also use a remote controller (sold separately. p.261) for bit exposures. When you press the remote controller's transmit button. the bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button again to stop the bulb exposure. 100 EFTA01126297 A-DEP : Automatic Depth-of-Field AE Objects in the foreground and background will be in focus automatically. All the AF points will function to detect the subject, and the aperture required to attain the necessary depth of field will be set automatically. • <A-DEP> stands for Auto-Depth of field. This mode sets the depth of field automatically. 2 Set the Mode Dial to <A•DEP>. Focus the subject. • Aim the AF points over the subjects and press the shutter button halfway (N). • All the subjects covered by the AF points flashing in red will be in focus. • If focus is not achieved, the picture cannot be taken. 3 Take the picture. ? FAQ • The aperture display in the viewfinder blinks. The exposure is correct. but the desired depth of field cannot be obtained. Either use a wide-angle lens or move farther away from the subjects. • The shutter speed display in the viewfinder blinks. If the '30— shutter speed blinks. it means that the subject is too dark. Increase the ISO speed. If the "40004 shutter speed blinks, it means that the subject is too bright. Decrease the ISO speed. • A slow shutter speed has been set. Use a tripod to steady the camera. • I want to use flash. Flash can be used, however, the result will be the same as using the <P> mode with flash. The desired depth of field will not be obtained. 101 EFTA01126298 CC Changing the Metering Mode* Four methods (metering modes) to measure the subjects brightness are provided. Normally, evaluative metering is recommended. In Basic Zone modes, evaluative metering is set automatically. EnOtanp/AEB 't.'. • .; Auto lighbfq ()WWI, tiering nre Cal /Mining node Iveuatitit Melt* [Si GO C•3 CJ 0 0 Select [Metering mode]. • Under the In') tab, select [Metering model, then press Ce,.. 2 Set the metering mode. • Select the desired metering mode, then press < GT3 Evaluative metering This is an all-around metering mode suited for portraits and even backlit subjects. The camera sets the exposure automatically to suit the scene. GO Partial metering Effective when the background is much brighter than the subject due to baddighting. etc. The gray area in the left figure is where the brightness is metered to obtain the standard exposure. [€1 Spot metering This is for metering a specific part of the subject or scene. The gray area in the left figure is where the brightness is mewed to obtain the standard exposure. This metering mode is for advanced users. C3 Center-weighted avenge metering The brightness is metered at the center and then averaged for the entire scene. This metering mode is for advanced users. tat With fig. the exposure setting will be locked when you press the shutter button halfway and focus is achieved. With C:D. CO. and C]. the exposure setting is set at the moment or exposure. (The exposure setting is not locked when you press the shutter button halfway.) 102 EFTA01126299 Setting Exposure Compensation * Av2I Setting Exposure Compensation Sot exposure compensation if the exposure (without flash) does not come out as desred. This feature can be used in Creative Zone modes (except <M>). You can set the exposure compensation up to ±5 stops m 1/3-stop Increments. I'ae 5.7 oxen kr a teeter imxft P 1/125 F5.6 4:1.0 Dares is:e.re Yr mile P 1/125 111 144,100 Making it brighter: Hold down the <ha> button and turn the <en> dial to the right. (Increased exposure) Making it darker: Hold down the <M2> button and turn the </> dial to the left. (Decreased exposure) ► As shown in the figure, the exposure level is displayed on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder. • After taking the picture, cancel the exposure compensation by setting h back to 0. Dark exposure I nova exposure or a brighter image ray • The exposure compensation amount displayed in the viewfinder goes up to only ±2 stops. If the exposure compensation amount exceeds x2 stops. the end of the exposure level indicator wd display <4, or <k>. • The exposure compensation can also be set with 1O' Expo. comp/ AEB1 (p.105). If you will set exposure compensation exceeding x2 stops. you should use (Cat Expo. compJAE8i to set it 103 EFTA01126300 Setting Exposure Compensation° ea Flash Exposure Compensation Set flash exposure compensation if the flash exposure of the subject does not come out as desired. You can set the flash exposure compensation up to ±2 stops In 113-stop increments. Press the cl:I> button. (010) ► The Quick Control screen will appear (p.41). Fr& El 2 Select [In]. • Press the <.:•> key to select [Gal. IA [Flash exposure comp.] will be Cason ci CC at displayed al the bottom Set the flash exposure 021-111r 3 compensation amount. near ci 00 AL • To make the flash exposure brighter, turn the cS> dial to the right. To make it darker. turn the <Q> dial to the left. (Decreased exposure) ess s ► When you press the shutter button halfway. the ca.> Icon will appear in the viewfinder. • After taking the picture, cancel the flash exposure compensation by setting k back to 0. If (Cs' Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.109) is set to any setting other than (Disable]. the image may look bright even if a decreased exposure compensation or decreased flash exposure compensation has been set. You can also set flash exposure compensation with (Built-in flash tune. setting) in [Of Flash control) (p.181). 104 EFTA01126301 MD Auto Exposure Bracketing * This feature takes exposure compensation a step further by varying the exposure automatically (up to ±2 stops in 1/3-stop increments) with three shots as shown below. You can then choose the best exposure. This is called AEB (Auto Exposure Bracketing). Standard exposure Darker exposure (Decreased exposure) Brighter exposure (Increased exposure) AE8 amount p • 125 a, 1 Select [Expo. compJAEB]. • Under the [01 tab, select [Expo. comp./AEB], then press <e>. 2 Set the AEB amount. • Turn the ciLl; > dial to set the AEB amount • Press the <AIP.> key to set the exposure compensation amount. If AEB is combined with exposure compensation, AEB will be applied centering on the exposure compensation amount. • Press <C), to set it. • When you press the <MENU> button to exit the menu, the AEB level will be displayed on the LCD monitor. 3 Take the picture. • Focus and press the shutter button completely. The three bracketed shots will be taken in this sequence: Standard exposure, decreased exposure, and increased exposure. 105 EFTA01126302 QED Auto Exposit. Bractating• Canceling AEB • Follow steps 1 and 2 to turn off the AEB amount display. • The AEB setting will also be canceled automatically if the power switch is set to <OFF>. flash recycling is completed. etc. 4 Shooting lips • Using AEB with continuous shooting: If <la> continuous shooting (p.88) has been set and you press the shutter button completely, the three bracketed shots will be taken continuously in this sequence: Standard exposure, decreased exposure, and increased exposure. • Using AEB with <❑> single shooting. Press the shutter button three times to take the three bracketed shots. The three bracketed shots will be exposed In the following sequence: Standard exposure. decreased exposure, and Increased exposure. • Using AEB with the self-timer or remote control (sold separately). With the self-timer or remote control (<i$J> or <$.)2>), you can take three continuous shots after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay. With <$.)c> (p.69) set, the number of continuous shots will be three times the number set. IP • Neither flash nor bulb exposures can be used with AEB. • If (Be Auto Lighting Optimizer) (p.109) is set to any setting other than (Disable). the AEB's effect might be minimal. 106 EFTA01126303 * Locking the Exposure* You can lock the exposure when the area of focus is to be different from the exposure metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at the same exposure setting. Press the <*> button to lock the exposure, then recompose and take the shot. This is called AE lock. It is effective for backlit subjects. -ADE° ea 0 AE Lock Effects 1Focus the subject. • Press the shutter button halfway. IP. The exposure setting will be displayed. 2 Press the <*> button. (64) ► The <*> icon lights in the viewfinder to indicate that the exposure setting is locked (AE lock). • Each time you press the <*> button. It locks the current autoexposure setting. 3 Recompose and take the picture. • If you want to maintain the AE lock while taking more shots, hold down the <*> button and press the shutter button to take another shot. Metering Mode (p.102) AF Point Selection Method (p.85) Automatic Selection Manual Selection Oa' AE lock is applied at the AF pant that achieved focus. AE lock is applied at the selected AF point. CZ I MC3 AE lock is applied at the center AF point. When the lens focus mode snitch is set lo <MF>. AE locks applied at the weer AF pont 107 EFTA01126304 Fr i 0 Qs c 9 * Locking the Flash Exposure* If the subject is on the side of the frame and you use flash, the subject may turn out to be too bright or dark depending on the background, etc. This is when you should use FE lock. After setting the proper flash exposure for the subject, you can recompose (put the subject toward the side) and shoot. This feature can also be used with a Canon EX- series Speedlite. FE stands tor Flash Exposure. 1 Press the c$> button. I. The built-in flash will rise. • Press the shutter button halfway and look in the viewfinder to check that the <$> icon is lit. ji Focus the subject. sz.o, wet,,,ng 3 Press the cif > button. (816) • Aim the spot-metering circle over the subject, then press the c*> button. I. The flash will fire a preflash and the required flash output is calculated and retained in memory. I. In the viewfinder, 'FEL" is displayed for a moment and <$46> will light. • Each time you press the <*> bunco. a preflash is fired and the required flash output is calculated and retained in memory. 4 Take the picture. • Compose the shot and press the shutter button completely. I. The flash is fired when the picture is taken. If the subject is too far away and beyond the effective range of the flash, the <S> icon will blink. Get closer to the subject and repeat steps 2 to 4. 108 EFTA01126305 aEILD Correcting the Brightness and Contrast Automatically * If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically. This feature is called Auto Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [Standard]. With JPEG images, the correction is done when the Image is captured. For RAW images. it can be corrected with Digital Photo Professional (provided software. p.302). Ext." corm htE8 • Auto Lynn; :r• titlen; nOrA• CLvdcrn 84tlanCl• letwi Oir.mar Standifil 5C. wad CU • 1 Select [Auto Lighting Optimizer]. • Under the [01 tab, select (Auto Lighting Optimizer), then press <e>. 2 Select the setting. • Select the desired setting, then press <e>. 3 Take the picture. • The image will be recorded with the brightness and contrast corrected if necessary. Without correction ',Mb correction • Under (ei Custom Functions (C.Fn)]. if (6: Highlight tone priority] is set to (1: Enable], the Auto Lighting Optima& be set automatically to (Disable) and you cannot change this setting. • Depending on the shooting conditions. noise might increase. • If a setting other than (Disable) is set and you use exposure compensation, flash exposure compensation. or manual exposure to darken the exposure, the image might still come out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set (Auto Lighting Optimizer] to (Disable] first In Basic Zone modes. (Standard] is set automabcaly. 109 EFTA01126306 GEE Correcting the image's Dark Corners • Due to the lens characteristics. the four corners of the picture might look darker. This phenomenon is called lens light fall-off or drop in peripheral illumination and can be corrected automatically. The default setting is [Enable]. With JPEG images, the correction is done when the image is captured. For RAW images, it can be corrected with Digital Photo Professional (provided software, p.302). P. Quaity al aro Enable Rinse shutter Mewl cord I WK. Mini 2 sac PenOtrai Ourrin (cow %MON* quoin correct Alteched lens EILSIB.liSe• H6 S'S 6 IS (Cfrett10168t4 od,ee Cc( rev c. f ,:• Nub* Correcbon disabled Correction enabled 1 Select [Peripheral illumin. correct]. • Under the [h) tab, select [Peripheral Illumin. correct.], then press cea. 2 Select the setting. • On the screen. check that [Correction data available] is displayed for the attached lens. • If [Correction data not available) is displayed, see 'About the Lens Correction Data" on the next page. • Select [Enable], then press <CD>. 3 Take the picture. • The image will be recorded with the corrected peripheral illumination. 4.1:Mplir r 110 EFTA01126307 IMID Correcting the Image's Dalk Corners About the Lens Correction Data The camera already contains lens peripheral illumination correction data for approx. 25 lenses. In step 2. if you select [Enable), the peripheral light correction will be applied automatically for any lens whose correction data has been registered in the camera. With EOS Utility (provided software, p.302), you can check which lenses have their correction data registered in the camera. You can also register the correction data for unregistered lenses. For details, see the Software Instruction Manual (CD-ROM) for EOS Utility (p.304). • For JPEG images already captured, lens peripheral illumination correction cannot be applied. • Depending on shooting conditions. noise might appear on the image periphery. • When using a non-Canon lens. setting the correction to (Disable) is recommended, even if (Correction data available) is displayed. • Lens peripheral light correction is also applied when an Extender is attached. • If the correction data for the attached lens has not been registered to the camera, the result me be the same as when the correction is set to (Disable). • The correction amount applied wdl be slightly lower than the maximum correction amount settable nth Nita] Photo Professional (provided software). • If the lens does not have distance information, the correction amount mil be lower. • The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be. 111 EFTA01126308 ,3 Customizing Image Characteristics * t. You can customize a Picture Style by adjusting individual parameters like (Sharpness) and (Contrast). To see the resulting effects, take test shots. To customize (Monochrome], see page 114. I Press the <1 4'4> button. 2 Select a Picture Style. • Select a Picture Style, then press the . I ' <INFO.> button. O. The Detail set. screen will appear. ...Li • 3 Select a parameter. onet,, • Select a parameter such as ILA cevast (Sharpness), then press ce>. Moak sa 4 Set the parameter. • Press the < AP. > key to adjust the parameter as desired, then press • Press the <MENU> button to save the adjusted parameters. The Picture Style selection screen will reappear. Po Any parameter settings different from the default will be displayed In blue. "st I' Otto' —11 SIMMS lel 112 EFTA01126309 3:a Customizing Image Characteristics Parameter Settings and Effects O Sharpness Adjusts the sharpness of the image. To make it less sharp, set it toward the 0 end. The closer it is to 0. the softer the image will look. To make it sharper, set it toward the U end. The closer it is to U. the sharper the image will look. c Contrast Adjusts the Image contrast and the vividness of colors. To decrease the contrast, set it toward the minus end. The closer it is to 0 the blander the image will look. To increase the contrast, set it toward the plus end. The closer It Is to 0. the crisper the Image will look. Saturation The image's color saturation can be adjusted. To decrease the color saturation, set it toward the minus end. The closer it is to 0. the more diluted the colors will took. To increase the color saturation, set it toward the plus end. The closer it is to 0. the bolder the colors will look. C Color tone The skin tones can be adjusted. To make the skin tone redder, set it toward the minus end. The closer it is to 0, the redder the skin tone will look. To make the skin tone less red, set it toward the plus end. The closer it is to 0. the more yellow the skin tone will look. • By selecting (Default set] in step 3. you can revert the respective Picture Style to its default parameter settings. • To shoot with the Picture Style you modified. follow step 2 on page 81 to select the modified Picture Style and then shoot. 113 EFTA01126310 .3:s• CustonSaki° Image Characteristics 6 Monochrome Adjustment For Monochrome, you can also set [Filter effect] and [Toning effect] in addition to [Sharpness] and [Contrast] explained on the preceding page. 'Filter Effect i Crf.tul, ‘e With a fitter effect applied to a monochrome image. you can make white clouds or green trees stand out ril0f0. Filter Sample Effects N: None Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects. Ye: Yellow The blue sky will look more natural. and the white clouds wit lock cdsper. °r: Cirange The blue sky MI look sbghtly darker. The sunset will more briliant. R: Red The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and brighter. G: Green Skin tones and lips will look fine. Tree leaves will look crisper and brighter. Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced. eToning Effect :r1 By applying a toning effect, you can create a monochrome image in that color. It can make the image look more impressive. The following can be selected: [N:None]. p:Seplat [ES:Blue], [P:Puiple] or [G:Green]. 114 EFTA01126311 J."; Registering Preferred Image Characteristics * You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait) or (Landscape), adjust Its parameters as desired and register it under [User Def. 1], [User Def. 2), or [User Def. 3). You can create Picture Styles whose parameter settings such as sharpness and contrast are different. You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style which has been registered to the camera with EOS Utility (provided software, p.302). f us« Do I Akio hove Styx OShartnen CCanrest &Satiation (CS we Press the <V > button. 2 Select [User Def.l. • Select [User Def."). then press the <INFO.> button. • The Detail set. screen will appear. 3 Press <C)>. • With [Picture Style] selected, press <e >. 4 Select the base Picture Style. • Press the <At > key to select the base Picture Style, then press <ei>. • To adjust the parameters of a Picture Style which has been registered to the camera with EOS Utility (provided software), select the Picture Style here. 115 EFTA01126312 Regitteliftg Preferred Image Charactenstics • auslat ISEIgarosf. Peen NOD S Nir a a .r( FEfl EESI Ea E2I Ell MI Ea/ CBDetse set Mae 5 Select a parameter. • Select a parameter such as (Sharpness), then press <e>. 6 Set the parameter. • Press the <AO.> key to adjust the parameter as desired, then press <CD>. For details, see "Customizing Image Characteristics" on pages 112-114. • Press the <MENU> button to register the modified Picture Style. The Picture Style selection screen will then reappear. ► The base Picture Style will be indicated on the right of (User Def. 1. • If a Piave Style has already been registered under (User Def.1 changing the base Picture Style in step 4 will nullify the parameter settings of the registered Picture Style. • If you execute (Clear all camera settings) (p.176). all the (User Def.') settings will revert to the default. Any Picture Style registered via EOS Utility (provided software) will have only its modified parameters reverted to the default setting. TSI To shoot with a registered Picture Style. follow step 2 on page 81 to select (User Def.') and then shoot. 116 EFTA01126313 WB: Matching the Light Source* The function adjusting the color tone so that white objects look white in the picture is called white balance (WB). Normally, the <Ma> (Auto) setting will obtain the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors cannot be obtained with <Ma>, you can select the white balance to match the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object. AL Press the <A WS> button. ► [White balance} will appear. 2 Select the white balance. • Press the <AP.> key or tum the dial to select the desired white balance, then press <(€)>. • The "Approx. ^"IC (K: Kelvin) displayed for the following white balance settings <*>, th„>, <a>. <t> or <NU> is the respective color temperature. Custom White Balance Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance for a specific light source for better accuracy. Do this procedure under the actual light source to be used. 0 0 0 \L.'s' 0 Spot metering circle 1 Photograph a white object. • The plain, white object should fill the spot metering circle. • Focus manually and set the standard exposure for the white object. • You can set any white balance. 117 EFTA01126314 WB. maiming the Light Source 2 Select [Custom White Balance]. • Under the ICI] tab, select [Custom White Balance], then press <e>. ► The custom white balance selection 100 amp /MB Ault) V00WIG OPtaniter vetoing malt Q° :A!Cal Write &Niece SNIVINKT :ea %0 urs 0.0/20 screen will appear. 'urn kik Arno 3 Import the white balance data. 2 • Select the image that was captured in step 1. then press <e>. P. O. On the dialog screen which appears. select (OK] and the data will be imported. • When the menu reappears. press the <MENU> button to exit the menu. C??0 I 1 4 Selpercetssththee <A custom white balance. • W8> button. -., ,c-±:, • Select [act]. then press <e>. Le i 0 • If the exposure obtakied in step 1 is way off, a correct white balance might not be obtained. • M image captured while the Picture Style was set to (Monochrome) (p.82) or an image processed with a Creative filter cannot be selected in step 3. ty • Instead of a white object. an 18% gray card (commercially available) can produce a more accurate white balance. • The personal white balance registered with EOS Utility (provided sofvare. p.302) will be registered under If you do step 3. the data for the registered personal white balance will be erased. 118 EFTA01126315 Adjusting the Color Tone for the Light Source * t. You can correct the white balance that has been set. This adjustment will have the same effect as using a commercially-available color temperature conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color can be corrected to one of nine levels. This is for advanced users who are familiar with using color temperature conversion or color compensating filters. White Balance Correction CEI0se• Select [WB Shift/BKM Expo coop /AFB '1..I Auto1.O0N cptutuir • Under the [01 tab, select [WS Shift/ UtterInc mole X BKTJ, then press <O›. Cuitcm %Pat Ilaiiror V11/81.1 tr cope space P. The WB correction/WS bracketing screen will appear. Pictve krk 2 Set the white balance correction. • Press the <4>> key to move the '•' mark to the desired position. U, L)t o trodat to icy err,/ i ree Or /J • B is for blue, A is amber, M is magenta, and G is green. The color in the respective direction will be Sample setting: A2, Cl corrected. • On the upper right, 'Shift" indicates the direction and correction amount. °Gal (Octet tO • Pressing the <INFO.> button will cancel all the MB ShiftifIKT) settings. • Press <C)> to exit the setting and return to the menu. • During the white balance correction. <i!> will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor. • One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to 5 mireds at a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Measuring unit indicating the density of a color temperature conversion feet.) 119 EFTA01126316 Adjusting the Color Tone la the Light Sowce° White Balance Auto Bracketing With just one shot, three images having a different color balance can be recorded simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the cunent white balance setting, the image vni be bracketed with a blue/amber bias or magentargreen bias. This is called white balance bracketing (WB-8KT). White balance bracketing is possible up to ±3 levels n single-level increments. WA bias ±3 'web Set the white balance bracketing amount • In step 2 for white balance correction. when you tum the > dial. thew mark on the screen MI change to '• • r' (3 points). Turning the dial to the right sets the B/A bracketing. and turning it to the left sets the M/G bracketing. ► On the light 'Bracket' Indicates the bracketing direction and correction amount. • Pressing the <INFO.> button will cancel all the (WB ShittnilKT] settings. • Press <C)› to exit the setting and return to the menu. Bracketing Sequence The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias. and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias. Irl During WB bracketing. the maximal burst for continuous shooting hill be lower and the norther of poss Cote shots wit also decrease to ale-third the normal number. Jt- • You can also set white balance correction and AE8 (p.105) together with while balance bracketing. If you set AE8 in combination with while balance bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded fa a single shot. • Since three images are recorded for one shot the card will take longer to record the shot. • 13KT stands for Brackebrig. 120 EFTA01126317 About Adobe RGB In Setting the Color Reproduction Range* ■ The range of reproducible colors is called the color space. With this camera, you can set the color space to sRGB or Adobe RGB for captured images. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended. In Basic Zone modes, sRGB is set automatically. Select [Color space]. • Under the [0'] tab, select [Color space), then press <e>. 2 Set the desired color space. • Select (sRGB] or [Adobe RGB), then press Ce>. This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other industrial uses. This setting is not recommended if you do not know about image processing, Adobe RGB. and Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exit 2.21). The image oil look very subdued in a sRGB personal computer environment and with printers not compatible with Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 (ExN 2.21). Post-processing of the image with software will therefore be required. • If the image is captured with the color space set to Adobe RGB. the file name will start with "_MG2 (fest charaaer is an underscore). • The ICC profile is not appended. See explanations about the ICC profile in the Software Instruction Manual (p.304) in the CD-ROM. 121 EFTA01126318 Mirror Lock-up to Reduce Camera Shake* ■ The camera's mechanical shake caused by the reflex mirror action can blur images taken with a super telephoto lens or dose-up (macro) lens. In such cases, mirror lockup is effective. Mirror lockup is enabled by setting [8: Mirror lockup] to [1: Enable] in the [9! Custom Functions (C.Fn)) (p.255). 1 Focus the subject, then press the shutter button completely. ► The mirror will swing up. 2 Press the shutter button completely again. ► The picture is taken and the mirror goes back down. • After taking the picture. set (8: Mirror lockup) to [0: Disable]. Shooting Tips • Using the self-timer <IS> <02> with mirror lockup. When you press the shutter button completely. the mirror locks up. then the picture is taken 10 sec. Or 2 sec. later. • Remote control shooting. Since you do not touch the camera when the picture is taken. remote control shooting together with mirror lockup can further prevent camera shake (p.261). With Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately) set to a 2-sec. delay. press the transmit button and the mirror will lockup before the picture is taken 2 sec. later. • In yen/ bright light such as at the beach or a ski slope 00 a sunny clay. take the picture promptly after mirror lockup. • Do not pore the camera toward the sun. The sun's heat can damage the camera's .,ternal components. • If you use the self-timer and mirror lockup in combination with a bulb exposure. keep pressing the shutter button completely (self-tmer delay time • bulb exposure brne). If you let go of the shutter button during the self-tmer countdown. there wit be a shutter-release sound. but no picture will be taken. 2 • Eon f <C1> (Conbnucus shooting) has been set single thong wit take effect. • If 30 seconds elapse after the mirror has locked up. it will go back down automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely again locks up the mirror again. 122 EFTA01126319 r Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting) You can shoot while viewing the image on the camera's LCD monitor. This is called "Live View shooting'. Live View shooting is effective for still subjects which do not move. If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the LCD monitor, camera shake can cause blurred images. Using a tripod is recommended. About Remote Live View Shooting With EOS Utility (provided software. p.302) installed in your computer, you can connect the camera to the computer and shoot remotely vrnde viewing the computer screen. For details. see the Software Instruction Manual (p.304) in the CD-ROM. EFTA01126320 O Shooting with the LCD Monitor 1 Display the Live View image. • Press the <0> button. ► The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor. • The Live View image will closely reflect the brightness level of the actual image you capture. 2 Focus the subject. • When you press the shutter button halfway. the camera will focus with the current AF mode (p.131-137). 3 Take the picture. • Press the shutter button completely. ► The picture will be taken and the captured image is displayed on the LCD monitor. ► After the image review ends, the camera win return to Live View shooting automatically. • Press the <re> button to exit Live View shooting. al • The image's field of view is approx. 99% (when the image-recording quality is set to JPEG AL). • The metering mode wad be fixed to evaluative metering for Live View shooting. • In Creative Zone modes. you can check the depth of field by pressing the depth-of-field preview button. • During continuous shooting, the exposure set for the first shot will also be applied to subsequent shots. • Using <A-DEP> will be the same as using <P>. • You can also use a remote controller (sold separately. p.261) for Live View shooting. 124 EFTA01126321 Sheeting with the LCD Monitor. Enabling Live View Shooting . . P UM vnv. Sh Set [Live View shoot] to [Enable). In Basic Zone modes, [Live View shoot.] will be displayed under [es'), and in Creative Zone modes, it will be displayed under RM. Battery Life with Live View Shooting [Approx. number of shots) Temperature Shooting Conditions No Flash 50% Flash Use At 23.0 i 73°F 200 180 At 0.0 / 32°F 170 150 • The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8 and CIPA (Camera 8 Imaging Products Association) testing standards. • With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8. contruous Live View shooting is possible as fa approx. 1 hr. 30 min. at 23°C 173°F. • During Live View shooting. do not point the lens toward the sun. The sun's heat can damage the camera's internal components. • Cautions for using Live View shooting are on pages 139-140. .:1] • When flash is used, there will be two shutter sounds, but only one shot vnll be taken. • If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period. the power will tom off automatically as set with (t' Auto power oft] (p.167). If [9. Auto power off] is set to [Ott]. the Live View function will terminate automatically after 30 min. (camera power remain on). • With the AV cable (provided) or HDMI cable (sold separately), you can display the Live View image on a TV (p.218.221). 125 EFTA01126322 shooting with the LCD Mont& About the Information Display • Each time you press the <INFO.> button, the inhumation display will change. AF mode • OM : Live mode • 01: : Face detection Live mode • re : Quick mode Shooting mode Drive mode While balance_ Auto Lighting Optimizer Image-recording quality Built-in flash— function AE lock Flash-ready <D Flash off ail Flash exposure — compensation I% External flash exposure compensation Shutter speed Picture Style Aperture AF point (Quick mode) Magnifying frame Histogram Eye-Fi card transmission status —FEB AEB Exposure simulation Battery check Highlight tone priority ISO speed Possible shots — Exposure level indicator/ AEB range yy • When <NI , is displayed in white. it indicates that the Lrve View image brightness is close to what the captured rnage will lock like. • If <OM> is Winking. it indicates that the Live View image m not being disp4ayed at the suitable brightness due to low• or bright-light conditions. However. the actual image recorded will reflect the exposure setting. • If flash m used or bulb m set, the <UM, icon and histogram will be grayed out (for your reference). The histogram might not be properly disp4ayed in low- or bright-light conditions. 126 EFTA01126323 Sheeting with the LCD Mender Final Image Simulation The final image simulation reflects the effects of the Picture Style, white balance. etc.. in the Live View image so you can see what the captured image will look like. During shooting, the Live View image will automatically reflect the function settings listed below. Final image simulation during Live View shooting • Picture Style • All parameters such as sharpness. contrast, color saturation. and color tone will be reflected. • White balance • White balance correction • Shoot by ambience selection • Shoot by lighting or scene type • Exposure • Depth of field (With depth-of-field preview button ON) • Auto Lighting Optimizer • Peripheral Illumination correction • Highlight tone priority • Aspect ratio (Image area confirmation) 127 EFTA01126324 Shooting Function Settings Function settings particular to Live View shooting are explained here. @ Quick Control While the image is displayed on the LCD monitor in Creative Zone modes, pressing the <ID> button will enable you to set the AF mode. drive mode. white balance. Picture Style. Auto Lighting Optimizer. image-recording quality. and built-in flash settings. In Basic Zone modes. you can set the AF mode and the settings shown in the table on Page 84. 2 Press the <0> button. > The functions settable with Quick Control will appear on the left of the screen. • If the AF mode is <01110>. the AF points will also be displayed. You can also select the AF point. Select a function and set it. • Press the <AY> key to select a function. ► The selected function and Feature guide (p.48) will appear. • Press the < > key or turn the <n> dial to change the setting. Pressing <8> will display the respective function's setting screen. In Creabve Zane modes, you can set the ISO speed by pressing the <ISO> button. 128 EFTA01126325 ds Menu Function Settings I tin View Moo Dude N•e! gre ime, aid did* Off Aspect nib 3:2 feat of Illsw The menu options below are displayed. In Basic Zone modes, the Live View menu options will be displayed under [09, and in Creative Zone modes, they will be displayed under Kin. • Live View shooting You can set Live View shooting to (Enable) or (Disable). • AF mode You can select (Live mode] (p.131), ra.; Live mode] (p.132). or [Quick mode] (p.136). • Grid display With [Grid 1-*] or [Grid 21Igt], you can display grid lines. It can help you level the camera vertically or horizontally. • Aspect ratio* The image's aspect ratio can be set to (3:21. (4:31, 06:91 or (1:11. The following aspect ratios will be indicated with lines on the Live View image: (4:31 (16:91 [1:1]. JPEG images will be saved with the set aspect ratio. RAW images will always be saved with the (3:21 aspect ratio. Since the aspect ratio information is appended to the RAW image, the image will be generated in the respective aspect ratio when you process the RAW image with the provided software. In the case of the 14:31. 116:91. and (1:1) aspect ratios, the aspect-ratio lines will appear during image playback, but the lines are not actually drawn on the image. —II The settings for these menu options will apply only to Live View shooting. They do not take effect during viewfinder shooting. 129 EFTA01126326 CC Menu Funcan Smtinu5 0w11ry Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count 3:2 I 4:3 16:9 1:1 L 5184x3456 (18.0 megapixels) 4608x3456 (16.0 megapixels) 5184x2912' (15.1 megapixels) 3456x3456 (11.9 megapixels) gm M 3456:O304 (8.0 megapixels) 3072/2304 (7.0 megapixeis) 3456x1944 (6.7 megapixels) 23044304 (5.3 megapixels) SI 2592x1728 (4.5 megapixels) 2304x1728 (4.0 megapixets) 2592x1456' (3.8 megapixels) 1728x1728 (3.0 megapixels) 52 1920x1280 (2.5 megapixels) 1696x1280' (2.2 megapixets) 1920x1080 (2.1 megapixels) 1280x1280 (1.6 megapixels) 53 720x480 (350,000 Oxeb) 640x480 (310,000 pixels) 720x400' (290,000 pixels) 480x480 (230.000 pixels) IS • Asterisked image-recording qualities do not exactly match the set aspect ratio. • The image area displayed for asterisked a-nage-recording qualities is slightly larger than the recorded area. Check the captured images on the LCD monitor when shooting. • If you use a different camera to directly print images shot with this camera in the 1:1 aspect ratio. the images might not be correctly printed. • Metering timer* You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock time). This option is not displayed in Basic Zone modes. (Metering timer is fixed at 16 sec.) If you select [Cr Dust Delete Data]. Sensor cleaning). Clear settings). or [4 Firmware Ver.). the Live View shooting wAlterminate. 130 EFTA01126327 AF point Changing the Autofocus Mode Selecting the AF Mode The AF modes available are [Live mode]. Live mode] (face detection, p.132), and (Quick mode] (p.136). If you want to achieve precise focus, set the lens focus mode switch to <INF>, magnify the image, and focus manually (p.138). lln* node 1: Live nut Quick Nude Select the AF mode. • Under the pH tab, select [AF mode] (Mel tab in Basic Zone modes). • Select the desired AF mode, then press <CD>. • While the Live View image is displayed, you can press the c()> button to select the AF mode on the Quick Control screen (p.128). Live Mode: ORD The image sensor is used to focus. Although AF is possible with the Live View Image displayed, the AF operation will take longer than with the Quick mode. Also, achieving focus may be more difficult than with the Quick mode. 1 Display the Live View image. • Press the <0> button. ► The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor. ► The AF point <0> will appear. Move the AF point. • Press the <e>> key to move the AF point to where you want to focus (it cannot go to the edges of the picture). • To return the AF point to the center, press the ce> or <§> button. 131 EFTA01126328 alallOilg the ALII0i0O.14 Mode Focus the subject. • Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway. O. When focus is achieved. the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound. IP. If focus is not achieved. the AF point will turn orange. 4 Take the picture. • Check the focus and exposure. then press the shutter button completely to take the picture (p.124). :i: (Face detection) Live Mode: M:!: With the same AF method as the Live mode, human faces are detected and focused. Have the target person face the camera. Display the Live View image. • Press the <d> button. ► The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor. • When a face is detected. the <: :> frame will appear over the face to be focused. • If multiple faces are detected. <4: >> will be displayed. Press the <-40-> key to move the <I: :I> frame over the desired target face. 132 EFTA01126329 changing the Autolocus Mode Focus the subject. • Press the shutter button halfway and the camera will focus the lace covered by the c". frame. ► When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound. ► If focus is not achieved, the AF point will turn orange. • If a face cannot be detected, the AF point <1.> will be displayed and AF will be executed at the center. 3 Take the picture. • Check the focus and exposure, then press the shutter button completely to take the picture (p.124). • If the focus is way off, face detection will not be possible. If the lens enables manual focusing even while the lens focus mode switch is set to <AF>. turn the focusing ring to attain rough focus. The face will then be detected and c: :> will be displayed. • An object other than a human face might be detected as a face. • Face detection will not work if the face is very small cc large in the picture, too bright or too dark titled horizontally or diagonally, or pertialy hidden. • The <: : > focusing frame might cover only part of the face. yl • When you press the <e> or < ft> bunco. the AF mode will switch to the Live mode (p.131). You can press the <.> key to move the AF point. Press the co, or <lb> button again to return to the ".±: (face detection) Live mode. • Since AF is not possible with a face detected near the edge of the picture. the <: :> will be grayed out. Then if you press the shutter button halfway, the center AF point <II> will be used to focus. 133 EFTA01126330 Changing the Autotocus Mode Live Mode and y (Face Detection) Live Mode Notes AF operation • Focusing will take slightly longer. • Even when focus has been achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway will focus again. • The image brightness may change during and after the AF operation. • If the light source changes while the Live View Image is displayed, the screen might flicker and focusing may be difficult. If this happens, stop the Live View shooting and autofocus under the actual light source first. • If you press the <a> button in the Live mode, the image will be magnified at the AF point. If focusing is difficult in the magnified view, return to the normal view and autofocus. Note that the AF speed may differ between the normal and magnified views. • If you autofocus in the Live mode's normal view and then magnify the image, the focus might be off. • In the y Live mode, pressing the <a> button will not magnify the image. • In the We mode or (face detection) Live mode. if you shoot a peripheral subject and it is slightly cut of focus, aim the center AF point over the subject to focus, then take the picture. • The AF-assist beam will not be emitted. However. if an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with a LED light is used, the LED bght will turn on for AF-assist when necessary in the Live mode and (face detection) Live mode. 134 EFTA01126331 Chancing the Autolocus Mode Shooting conditions which can make focusing difficult: • Low-contrast subjects such as the blue sky and solid-color, flat surfaces. • Subjects in low light. • Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the horizontal direction. • Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps changing. • Night scenes or points of light. • Under fluorescent lighting or when the image flickers. • Extremely small subjects. • Subjects at the edge of the picture. • Subjects strongly reflecting light. • The AF point covers both a near and faraway subject (such as an animal in a cage). • Subjects which keep moving within the AF point and cannot keep still due to camera shake or subject blur. • A subject approaching or moving away from the camera. • Autotocusing while the subject is way out of focus. • Soft focus effect is applied with a soft locus lens. • A special effects filter is used. 135 EFTA01126332 Glancing the Autofocus Mode fAagmfreg frame Quick Mode: ME The dedicated AF sensor is used to focus in One-Shot AF mode (p.83), using the same AF method as with viewfinder shooting. Although you can focus the target area quickly, the Live View Image will be Interrupted momentadly during the AF operation. AF point 1 Display the Live View image. - • Press the cfl> button. ► The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor. • The small boxes on the screen are the AF points, and the larger box is the magnifying frame. 2 Select the AF point. * • Press the <g> button (610) to display the Quick Control screen. • The sellable functions will be displayed on the left of the screen. • Press the <AV> key to make the AF point selectable. • Tum the </, dial to select the AF point. 136 EFTA01126333 Chancing the Autolocus Mode 5 3 Focus the subject. • Aim the AF point over the subject and press the shutter button halfway. ► The Live View image will turn off, the reflex mirror will go back down. and AF will be executed. ► When focus is achieved, the AF point which achieved focus will tum green and the Live View image will reappear. ► If focus is not achieved, the AF point will turn orange and blink. 4 Take the picture. • Check the focus and exposure, then press the shutter button completely to take the picture (p.124). You cannot take a pictwe during autofocusing. Take the picture while the Live View rages displayed. 137 EFTA01126334 MF: Focusing Manually You can magnify the image and focus precisely manually. 1 Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF>. • Turn the lens focusing ring to focus roughly. AE lock Magnified area position Magnzficabon 5 Move the magnifying frame. • Press the <.y> key to move the magnifying frame to the position where you want to locus. • To return the magnifying frame to the center, press the <e› or <II> button. Magnify the image. • Press the <a> button. • The area within the magnifying frame will be magnified. • Each time you press the <a> button, the view will change as follows: F. 5x » 10x — Normal view 7 Focus manually. • While looking at the magnified image, turn the lens focusing ring to focus. • After achieving focus, press the ca> button to return to the normal view. Take the picture. • Check the focus and exposure, then press the shutter button to take the picture (p.124). 138 EFTA01126335 40 Live View Shooting Cautions White <PI> and Red Cm> Internal Temperature Warning Icons • If the camera's internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live View shooting or a high ambient temperature. a white <Q> icon will appear. If you continue shooting while this icon is displayed, the image quality of still photos may deteriorate. You should stop the Live View shooting and allow the camera to cool down before shooting again. • If the camera's internal temperature bather increases while the white <N' icon is displayed, a red <n> icon will start blinking. This blinking icon is a wamng that the Live View shooting will soon be terminated automatically. If this happens. you will not be able to shoot again until the camera's internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while. • Shooting with the Live View function at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause the <II' and <n> icons to appear earlier. When not shooting, turn off the camera. Live View Image Cautions • Under low- or bright-light conditions. the Live View image might not reflect the brightness of the captured image. • If the light source within the image changes. the screen might flicker. If this happens, stop the Live View shooting and resume shooting under the actual light source to be used. • If you point the camera in a different direction. it might throw off the Live View image's correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness level stabilizes before shooting. • If there is a very bright light source in the picture. such as the sun. the bright area might appear black on the LCD monitor. However. the actual captured image will correctly show the bright area. • In low light. if you set the (in LCD brightness] to a bright setting. prominence noise may appear in the Live View image. However, the civominance noise will not be recorded in the caphred image. • When you magnify the image. the image sharpness may look more pronounced than it really is. 139 EFTA01126336 Live View Shooting Cautions Shooting Result Cautions • VVhen you shoot continuously with the Live View function for a long period. the camera's internal temperature may increase and it can degrade image quality. Terminate Live View shooting when not shooting images. • Before taking a long exposure. stop Live View shooting temporarily and wait several minutes before shooting. This is to prevent image degradation. • We View shootng m high temperatures and at high ISO speeds may cause noise or irregular colors. • When you shoot at high ISO speeds. noise (banding. dots of fight etc.) may become noticeable. • If you take the picture during magnified view, the exposure might not come out as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picket.. During the magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed in orange. Even if you take the picture during magnified view. the image will be captured in the normal view. • If (Ct Auto Lighting Optimizer) (p.109) is not set to (Disable), the image may look bright even if a decreased exposure compensation or decreased flash exposure compensation has been set. • If you use a TS-E lens to shift the lens vertically or use an Extension Tube, the standard exposure might not be obtained or an irregular exposure may result Custom Function Cautions • During Live View shooting. certain Custom Function settings will not take effect (p.251). Lens and Flash Cautions • The focus preset feature on super telephoto lenses cannot be used. • FE lock is not possible when the buih-in flash or an external Speedlite is used. Modeling flash will not work with an external Speedlite. 140 EFTA01126337 Shooting Movies Set the Mode Dial to <'p> to shoot movies. The movie recording format will be MOV. Cards which can record movies When shooting movies. use a large-capacity SD card rated SD Speed Class 6 "aASag" or higher. If you use a slow-wining card when shooting movies. the movie might not be recorded property. And if you playback a movie on a card having a slow rearing speed, the movie might not playback properly. To check the cards read/write speed. refer to the card manufacturer's Web site. About Full HD 1080 Fuji HD 1080 indicates compatbaity with H.gh- Definition featuring 1080 vertical pixels (scanneig lines). FULL I-D EFTA01126338 Recording movie IP Shooting Movies Connecting the camera to a TV set is recommended to playback the movies shot (p.218, 221). Autoexposure Shooting I Set the Mode Dial to <HAI>. P. The reflex mirror will make a sound, then the image will appear on the LCD monitor. 2 Focus the subject. • Before shooting a movie, autofocus or manual locus (p.131-138). • When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will locus with the current AF mode. Shoot the movie. • Press the <0> button to start shooting a movie. To stop movie shooting, press <es> again. lo While the movie is being shot, the 111" mark will be displayed on the upper right of the screen. 3 142 EFTA01126339 Shooting Movies • During movie shooting, do not point the lens toward the sun. The sun's heat can damage the camera's internal components. • Cautions for movie shooting are on pages 163 and 164. • If necessary, also read the Live View shooting cautions on pages 139 and 140. • The ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture are set automatically. • AE lock is possible by pressing the <if-, button (p.107). To cancel AE lock during movie shcobng, press the <CD> button. • By holding down the cA3/483, button and turning the <n> dial, you can set the exposure compensation. • Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the shutter speed, aperture. and ISO speed (p.146) on the screen's bottom. This is the exposure setting for taking a sbl photo. • On the shooting information display (p.227). if you playback a movie shot with autoexposure. the shutter speed and aperture we not be displayed. The image information (Exit) will record the settings used at the start of the movie shooting. Using an EX-series Speedlite (Sold Separately) Equipped with a LED Light This camera is compatible with the function turning on the LED light automatically in low-light conditions during autoexposure shooting. For details, see the EX-sedes Speedlite's Instruction manual. 143 EFTA01126340 IP Sheeting Mower Manual Exposure Shooting You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture. and ISO speed for movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for advanced users. tocr.,re ALto Al men the male we Van button dunm; S inew/hf 1:0 button Vont expOSite II Vanua 125 8.0 -11171 2 .3 <MIN> • < if > 2 3 5 Set the Mode Dial to <ii>. l> The reflex mirror will make a sound, then the image will appear on the LCD monitor. Select [Movie exposure]. • Press the <MENU> button and under the tab, select (Movie exposure], then press ce>. Select [Manual]. • Select (Manual). then press <e>. Set the shutter speed and aperture. • To set the shutter speed. turn the cea.\ > dial. The settable shutter speeds depend on the frame rate cr.>. • ra 1 PR, : 1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec. • 41, 1 m : 1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec. • To set the aperture, hold down the <AvEi > button and turn the <n> dial. Set the ISO speed. • Press the <IS0> button and press the c a.> key or turn the <s> dial to select the ISO speed. • (AUTO) setting : ISO 100 - 6400 • Manual ISO setting : ISO 100 - 6400 144 EFTA01126341 IT Shooting Movies 6 Focus and shoot the movie. • The procedure is the same as steps 2 and 3 for 'Autoexposure Shooting" (p.142). 0 • AE lock and exposure compensation cannot be set. • Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded. • If you use a lens whose maximum aperture changes while you zoom. you should not zoom while shooting a movie. Changes in the exposure may be recorded. • If you shoot a movie under fluorescent lighting. the movie image might flicker. • With ISO Auto. the standard movie exposure will usually be obtained even if the light level changes. • When shooting a movie of a moving subject. a shutter speed of 1/30 sec. to 1/125 sec. IS recommended. The faster the shutter speed. the less smooth the subject's movement wAl look. 145 EFTA01126342 IP shooting Movies About the Information Display • Each time you press the <INFO.> button, the information display will change. AF mode • SE : Live mode • iv. : Face detection Live mode • /00 : Chick mode Movie shooting mode — Picture Style Movie shooting remaining time! Elapsed time AF point (Quick mode) — Magnifying frame n Recording TOM White balance Auto Lighting Optimizer Image-recordrig quality Movie recordrig size — Video snapshot AE lock— LED light Frame rate — Shutter speed Aperture Video snapshot shooting duration Digital zoom magnification Battery check -Ex osure mode Autoexposure Manual exposure Highlight tone priority — Rec. level: Manual — ISO speed —Possible shots Exposure compensation amount ' When an Eye-F' card has been inserted in the camera. the Eye-A transmission status (p.265) will be displayed. • If there is no card in the camera, the movie shooting remaning time will be displayed in red. • When movie shooting starts. the movie shooting remaining time will change to the elapsed time. 146 EFTA01126343 it shooting Movies Notes for Both Autoexposure and Manual Exposure Shooting • A movie file is recorded each time you shoot a movie. • The image's field of view is approx. 99%. • The sound will be recorded by the camera's built-in monaural microphone (p.102). • Stereo sound recording is possible by connecting an external microphone (commercially available) equipped with a stereo mini plug (3.5mm dia.) to the camera's extemal microphone IN terminal (p.18). • Movie-related settings are under the (C -I. (Oar). and (Dee) menu tabs (p.157). • With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E13. the total shooting time will be as follows: At 23°Cf73`F: Approx. 1 hr. 00 min.. At 0°C/324F: Approx. 1 hr. 20 min. Final Image Simulation The final Image simulation reflects the effects of the Picture Style, white balance, etc.. in the movie image so you can see what the captured movie will look like. During movie shooting, the movie image will automatically reflect the settings fisted below. Final image simulation for movie shooting • Picture Style All parameters such as sharpness. contrast. color saturation. and color tone will be reflected. • White balance • Exposure • Depth of field • Auto Lighting Optimizer • Peripheral illumination correction • Highlight tone priority 147 EFTA01126344 'U Sheeting Movies Shooting Still Photos While shooting a movie, you can also take a still photo by pressing the shutter button completely. Shooting Stills in the <'U> Mode • If you take a still photo during movie shooting, the movie will record a still moment lasting approx. 1 sec. • The captured still photo will be recorded to the card. and the movie shooting will resume automatically when the Live View image is displayed. • The movie and still photo will be recorded as separate files on the card. • Functions particular to still shooting are shown below. Other functions will be the same as for movie shooting. Function Settings Image-recording quality As set in (0I. Quality]. When the movie-recording size is (1920x1080) or [1280x720). the aspect ratio will be 16:9. When the size is [640x480), the aspect ratio will be 4:3. Exposure setting • Autoexposure shootkig: Shutter speed and aperture automabcary set (displayed when presseig the shutter button halfway). • Manual exposure shoottig: Shutter speed and aperture manually set. AEB Canceled Drive mode Single shooting (Self-timer not possible) Flash Flash off 148 EFTA01126345 Shooting Function Settings Function settings particular to movie shooting are explained here. ig) Quick Control While the image is displayed on the LCD monitor, you can press the <@> button to set the AF mode, white balance. Picture Style, Auto Lighting Optimizer, image-recording quality (for still photos), movie- recording size, movie digital zoom, and video snapshots. 1 2 Press the <CI> button. (NO) ► The functions sellable with Quick Control will appear on the left of the screen. • If the AF mode is < efill>. the AF point will also be displayed. Select a function and set it. • Press the <AT> key to select a function. ► The selected function and Feature guide (p.48) will appear. • Press the <'4►> key or tum the ca> dial to change the setting. Pressing <O> will display the respective function's setting screen. The image-recording quality setting will be reflected in all shooting modes. 149 EFTA01126346 MENU Setting the Movie-recording Size Ilene rec tin itlYx1040 30ros MOO va, 'a 5.n. Wall Under the [Crul tab. (Movie rec. size) enables you to select the movie's image size Innxml and frame rate (17..) (frames recorded per second). The r. (frame rate) switches automatically depending on the [So Video system) setting. • Image size (1920)(1080) : Full High-Definition (Full HD) recording quality. (1280x720) : High-Definition (HD) recording quality. (640x480) : Standard-definition recording quality. The aspect ratio will be 4:3. • Frame rate (fps: frames per second) (Pa) (MI : For areas where the TV format is NTSC (North America. Japan. Korea. Mexico. etc.). MI : For areas where the TV format is PAL (Europe. Russia, China. Australia, etc.). ITA) : Mainly for motion pictures. till When [1920x1080) S set as movie recording size, you can use the digital zoom. For the setting procedure, see page 152. 150 EFTA01126347 ME Setting the Movie-recording Size Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute Due to limitations of the file system. movie shooting will stop automatically if the file size of a single movie clip reaches 4GB. To resume movie shooting. press the <O> button. (A new movie file starts being recorded.) Movie-recording Size Total Recording Time (approx.) File Size (approx.) 4OB Card SOB Card 1608 Card [1920x1080) ITo 11 min. 22 min. 44 min. 330 Ma/min. TA M [1280x720) 11 min. 22 min. 44 min. 330 Mg/rm. ria [640x4801 ri 46 min. 1 hr. 32 rein. 3 hr. 4 min. 82.5 litelmin. a 0 • An increase of the camera's internal temperature may cause movie shooting to stop before the maximum recciang time shown in the table above (p.163). • The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 29 min. 59 sec. Depending on the subject and the increase in the camera's internal temperature. the movie shooting right step sooner than 29 nn. 59 sec. With 2comBrowser EXilmageBrowser (provided software. p.302). you can extract still photos from a movie. The still image quakily will be as follows: Approx. 2.1 megapixels at (1920x1080). approx. 920.000 pixels at (12130x720). and approx. 310.000 pixels at (640x480). 151 EFTA01126348 CUM Using Movie Digital Zoom Men the image size is set to (1920x1080) (Full HD). you can shoot with an approx. 3x to 10x digital zoom. 19207.1080 30fps 1000 Nytal Man 1-10x Wore roc In Rd?: cats Elora f4 fn;na: tam Select [1920x1080 • Under the [SW) tab, set Movie rec. the) to [1920x1080 M.] by turning the <n> dial. 2 set the digital zoom. • press the <IOW > key to select [CM. then press <e›. • Press the <MENU> button to exit the menu and return to movie shooting. 3 Use digital zoom. • While holding down the <INSP.> button, press the <0.> (zoom in) or <Mg> (zoom out) button. • In step 2, you can cancel digital zoom by selecting [OFF]. • Using a tripod m recommended to prevent camera shake. • The image cannot be magnified for focusing. • Even if the AF mode has been set to (Quick mode), it Mil switch automatically to (Live mode) during movie shooting. Also. in (Live mode). the AF point is displayed larger than with other recording sizes. • Since the image is processed digitally when using the digital zoom. the hgher the zoom magnification. the rougher it will look. • If you use dgital zoom. nose and light spots may be more visible. • Focusing may be difficult if the AF point covers both a near and far subject. • Still photo shooting is not possible. 152 EFTA01126349 MENU Taking Video Snapshots You can easily create a short movie with the video snapshot function. A video snapshot is a short movie clip lasting 2 sec., 4 sec.. or 8 sec. A collection of video snapshots is called a video snapshot album and can be saved to the card as a single movie He. By changing the scene or angle in each video snapshot, you can create dynamic short movies. A video snapshot album can also be played together with background music (p.158, 213). Video Snapshot Album Concept I I Video snapshot 1 ÷ p Video snapshot 2 \Sdeo snapshot album Video snapshot x Setting the Video Snapshot Shooting Duration In step 2 below, you can select [2 sec. movie] for example, and each video snapshot you shoot will be 2 sec. long. Select [Video snapshot'. • Under the (0.1 tab, select [Video snapshot]. 2 Select the [Video snapshot] shooting duration. • Press the <0> key to select the video snapshot shooting duration. then press <e>. • Press the <MENU> button to exit the menu and return to movie shooting, 153 EFTA01126350 Taking Video Snapshots Shooting duration Creating a Video Snapshot Album 3 Shoot the first video snapshot. • Press the <0> button to shoot. IP. The blue bars indicating the shooting duration will gradually decrease. After the set shooting duration elapses, the shooting stops automatically. ► After the LCD monitor turns off and the access lamp stops blinking, the confirmation screen will appear. Save as a video snapshot album. • Press the c .0> key to select [Ei Save as album]. then press < >. ► The movie clip will be saved as the video snapshot album's first video snapshot. 5 Continue to shoot more video snapshots. • Repeat step 3 to shoot the next video snapshot. • Press the <AP.> key to select [Si Add to album], then press <s>. • To create another video snapshot album, select [L? Save as a new album]. Quit the video snapshot shooting. • Set [Video snapshot] to [Disable]. To return to normal movie shooting, be sure to set [Disable]. • Press the <MENU> button to exit the menu and return to normal movie shooting. ti Von. re< it 19204'CE11 Sound EKOninq NAG laterirg trner I6 sec. Gi dean Off video snsostot OWN* 6 I EFTA01126351 MI Taking Video snapshots Options in Steps 4 and 5 Option Descrlpdon Å Save as album (Step 4) The movie clip will be saved as the video snapshot album's first video snapshot. gj Add to album (Step 5) The video snapshot just recorded will be added to the album recorded inrnedately before. Save as a new album (Step 5) A new video snapshot album is created and the movie dip is saved as the first video LI snapshot. The new album will be a different file from the previously recorded album. 2 Playback video snapshot (Steps 4 and 5) The video snapshot just recorded will be played. For playback operations. see the table below. ‘,J Do not save to album (Step 4) jai Delete without saving to album (Step 5) If you want to delete the video snapshot you just recorded and not save it to the album. select [Oa [Playback video snapshot' Operations Operation Playback Deacdplion b Exit Returns to the previous screen. ill• Play By pressing <e)>. you can play or pause the just- recorded video snapshot. NI Fint frame Displays the first scene of the album's first video snapshot. M Skip backward' Each time you press <e>. the video snapshot skips back by a few seconds. NI Previous frame Each time you press <e>, a single previous frame is displayed. If you hold down <e>. it veil rewind the movie. BP Next frame Each time you press <@>, the movie will play frame-by- frame. If you hold down <En>. 4 will fast forward the movie. (II Skip Sward. Eachtcli me you by a fewPressescon<2>. the video snapshot skips NI Last frame Displays the last scene of the album's last video snapshot Playback position nn' ss" Playback tine (minutes:seconds) I Volume You can adjust the built-in speaker's (p.210) sound vott ne by turning the <i'L'3> dial. ' With (Skip backward Skip forward]. the skipping duration wi correspond io the number el seconds sel under (Video snapshot] (approx.2 sec.. 4 sec., or S sec.). 155 EFTA01126352 GED Taking Video Snapshots 41 • You can add to an album only video snapshots havng the same awabon (approx. 2 sec.. 4 sec.. or 8sec, each). If you slop shooting a videosnapshot before the set shooting duration elapses. the video snapshot wit be added to the preceding album. And a new abum wit be created for subsequent video snapshots. • Note that if you do any of the following while shooting video snapshots, a new album will be created for subsequent video snapshots. • Changing the (Movie rec. size( (p.150). • Changing the (Video snapshot) shooting duration (p.153). • Changing the (Sound rec.( setting from (Auto/Manual) to (Disable) or from (Disable) to (Auto/Manual) (p.160). • Opening/closing the card slot cover or battery comparbnent cover. • interrupting the use of AC Adapter Kit ACK£8 (sold separately). • Updating the firmware. • You cannot change the order at the video snapshots in an album or add more video snapshots to the album later. • You cannot take still photos while shooting a video snapshot. • The shooting duration of a video snapshot is only approximate. Dependng on the frame rale. the shooing duration displayed during playback might not be exact Playing an Album You can playback a completed album in the same way as a normal movie. For details. see pages 212 and 217. • Press the <O> button. • Press the <AI. > key to select an album, then press <O>. • Movies shot as a video snapshot WI have an <QED > loco on the screen's upper left. 1;!I • Music recorded on the memory card must be used only for private enjoyment Do not violate the rights of the copyright holder. • To play background music. you must first copy the background music from the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk (provided) to the card. For the copying procedure. see the Software Instruction Manual it the CD-ROM. Provided Software Usable with Albums • EOS Utility: By copying background music to the card. you can play background music together with the playback of albums. normal movies. and slide shows on the camera. • Zoom8rowser EX/ImageBrowser: The edition of albums is possible. 156 EFTA01126353 MID Menu Function Settings The menu options displayed under the (Or (Or], and [Or] tabs are explained below. [SW] tab • Movie exposure Normally, set this to [Auto]. Setting it to (Manual] enables you to manually set the ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture for movie shooting (p.144). • AF mode The AF modes will be the same as described on pages 131-137. You can select [Live mode], (*.i: Live mode], or [Quick mode]. Note that continuous focusing of a moving subject is not possible. • AF with shutter button during (movie recording) When [Enable] is set, AF is possible during movie shooting. However, continuous autofocusing is not possible. If you autofocus during movie shooting, you might momentarily throw the focus way off or change the exposure. The movie will also record the lens operation noise. If the AF mode is set to [quick mode], AF will be executed in (Live mode]. • The settings under the (ial•'/O..:ICb.il menu tabs will take effect only in the eIRI> mode. They will not be applied in shooting modes other than the <",?> mode. • The AF mode setting vat] also be applied to Live Meet shooting. 157 EFTA01126354 MEM Menu FLIACHOA Set14194 • 'IF Shutter/AE lock button You can change the function assigned to the shutter button's halfway position and to the AE lock button. • AHAE lock: Normal function. Press the shutter button halfway to execute AR. Press the <*> button for AE lock. • AE lock/AF: Press the shutter button halfway for AE lock. For AR press the <*> button. Convenient when you want to focus and meter at different parts of the picture. • ARAF look, no AE look: Press the shutter button halfway to execute AF. While holding down the <*> button, press the shutter button to take a still photo without executing AF. Convenient when you do not want to autofocus when taking a still photo during movie shooting. AE lock is not possible. • AE/AF, no AE lock: Press the shutter button halfway for metering. For AF. press the <*> button. AE lock is not possible. 158 EFTA01126355 MD Menu Function Settings • Remote control You can use the Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.261) to start and stop the movie shooting. Set the release mode switch to <2›, then press the transmit button. If the switch is set to <111> (immediate shooting), still photo shooting will take effect. • 11Highlight tone priority If [Enable] is set, highlight detail will be improved. The dynamic range is expanded from the standard 18% gray to bright highlights. The gradation between the grays and highlights becomes smoother. The satiable ISO speed range will be ISO 2004400. The Auto Lighting Optimizer will also be set automatically to [Disable] and cannot be changed. 159 EFTA01126356 In Menu Function Settings [SW] tab • Sound recording En • Level meter Normally, the built-in microphone will record monaural sound. Stereo sound recording is possible by connecting an external microphone equipped with a stereo mini plug (3.5mm dia.) to the camera's external microphone IN terminal (p.16). When an external microphone is connected. sound recording will switch automatically to the external microphone. [Sound rec.) options (Auto) : The sound recording level will be adjusted automatically. Auto level control will operate automatically in response to the sound level. (Manual) : For advanced users. You can adjust the sound recording level to one of 64 levels. Select (Rec. level( and look at the level meter while pressing the <0> key to adjust the sound recording level. While looking at the peak hold indicator (approx. 3 sec.). adjust so that the level meter sometimes lights up the "12' (-12 dB) mark on the right for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds '0." the sound will be distorted. (Disable) : Sound will not be recorded. 160 EFTA01126357 CM Menu Function Settings [Wind filter] When [Enable) is set. outdoor wind noise entering the microphone will be reduced. Note that some low-tone noise might also be reduced. When shooting in places where there is no wind, set this to [Disable] for a more natural sound recording. .711 • The sound volume balance between L (left)and R (right) cannot be adjusted. • The 48 kHz sampIng frequency will be 16-bit recordings for both L and R. • Metering timer You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock time). • Grid display With (Grid l*i or (Grid 2196 J, you can display grid lines. It can help you level the camera vertically or horizontally. • Video snapshot For video snapshots, you can set the shooting duration for a single video snapshot to approx. 2 sec.. 4 sec.. or 8 sec. For details. see page 153. The Metering timer and Grid display settings will also be reflected in Live Mew shooting. 161 EFTA01126358 ME Menu anction Settings [61,1 tab • Exposure compensation Although exposure compensation can be set up to t5 stops. exposure compensation for movies is restricted only up to t3 stops. For still photos, exposure compensation may extend up to t5 stops. • Auto Lighting Optimizer The Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set as explained on page 109. It will be applied to both movie shooting and still photos taken during movie shooting. Under the [Olin tab, if ['!!Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable]. the Auto Lighting Optimizer will be set automatically to [Disable] and cannot be changed. • Custom White Balance As explained on page 117, the image for custom white balance can be selected. • Picture Style The Picture Style can be set as explained on page 81. It will be applied to both movie shooting and still photos taken during movie shooting. 162 EFTA01126359 • White <IR> and Red <[I> Internal Temperature Warning Icons • If the camera's internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie shooting or a high ambient temperature. a white <VI> icon will appear. Even if you shoot a movie while this icon m displayed. the movie's image quality will not be affected. However. d you shoot still photos. the image quality of the still photos may deteriorate. You should stop shooting still photos and allow the camera to cool down. • If the camera's internal temperature (utter increases while the white <11, icon es displayed, a red <n> icon may start blinking. This blinking icon is a warning that movie shooting wet soon be laminated automatically. It this happens. you will not be able to shoot again until the camera's internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while. • Movie shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause the ce, and <II, icons to appear sooner. When not shooting. turn off the camera. ▪ Movie Shooting Cautions Recording and Image Quality • If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all tines even if you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image Stabilizer will thereby consume battery power and may shorten the total movie shooting time or decrease the number of possible shots. If you use a tripod or if the Image Stabilizer is not necessary, you should set the IS switch to <OFF >. • The camera's built-in microphone will also record camera operation noise. Using a commercially-evadable external microphone can prevent (or reduce) these noises from being recorded. • Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the camera's external microphone IN terminal. • If movie shooting is not possible due to ',sufficient remaining capacity of the card, the movie recording size and movie shooting remaining time (p.146) will be displayed in red. 163 EFTA01126360 Movie Shooting Cautions Recording and Image Quality • If you use a card having a slow *Tiling speed. a five-level indicator might appear on the right of the screen during movie shooting. It indicates how much data has not yet been written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal buffer memory). The slower the card. the faster the indicator will climb upward. If the indicator becomes full. movie shooting vrill stop automatically. Indicator If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator aia either not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward. First. shoot a few test movies to see if the card can mite fast enough. If you take still photos during movie shooting. the movie shooting might stop. Setting a low image-recording quakty for still images might resolve this problem. Playback and TV connection • If the brightness changes during autcexposure movie shooting. that pail might look momentarily sal when you playback the movie. In such cases. shoot movies with manual exposure. • If you connect the camera to a N set with an HMI cable (p.218) and shoot a movie in (1920x1080) or (1280x720). the movie being shot will be displayed at a small size on the N. However. the actual movie wad be properly recorded at the movie recording size that was set. • If you connect the camera to a TV set (p.218. 221) and shoot a movie. the N will not output any sound during the shooting. However. the sound will be properly recorded. 164 EFTA01126361 Handy Features • Silencing the Beeper (p.166) • Card Reminder (p.166) • Setting the Image Review lime (p.166) • Setting the Auto Power-off Time (p.167) • Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness (p.167) • Creating and Selecting a Folder (p.168) • File Numbering Methods (p.170) • Setting Copyright Information (p.172) • Auto Rotation of Vertical Images (p.174) • Checking Camera Settings (p.175) • Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings (p.176) • Turning the LCD Monitor Off/On (p.179) • Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color (p.179) • Setting the Flash (p.180) • Automatic Sensor Cleaning (p.184) • Appending Dust Delete Data (p.185) • Manual Sensor Cleaning (p.187) EFTA01126362 Handy Features agE9 Silencing the Beeper You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved or during self-timer operation. I 1 " Under the KV) tab, select [Beep). then press ce>. Select [Disable], then press Ce>. MD Card Reminder This prevents shooting if there is no card in the camera. !cc Pe1441. ViAter wethDit (4, 0 Under the Iti) tab. select [Release shutter without card), then press ce>. Select [Disable). then press <C)>. If there is no card installed and you press the shutter button, "Card" will be displayed in the viewfinder, and you cannot release the shutter. IBM Setting the Image Review Time You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor immediately after capture. If [Off) is set, the image will not be displayed immediately after image capture. If [Hold) is set. the image review will be displayed up until the [Auto power off) time. During image review. if you operate any camera controls such as pressing the shutter button halfway, the image review will end. Under the [OA tab, select [Image review). then press <8>. Select the desired setting, then press <5>. 4 IA tti 166 EFTA01126363 Handy Features BM Setting the Auto Power-off Time To save battery power. the camera turns off automatically after the set time of idle operation elapses. You can set this auto power-off time. When the camera has turned off due to auto power off, you can wake it up by pressing the shutter button halfway or pressing any of the fo0owing buttons: <MENU>. <DISP.>, <O>, <O> etc. If [Off] has been set, either turn off the camera yourself or press the <DISE.> button to turn off the LCD monitor to save battery power. Even If [Off] has been set and the camera is not used for 30 min., the LCD monitor will turn off automatically. To turn on the LCD monitor again. press the <INSP.> button. Under the WI tab, select (Auto power off]. then press <O'. Select the desired setting. then press Ce>. Auto point oN 30 toK I st ten. $ Si, IS a Off OEM Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness You can adjust the Ltiudtress of the LCD monitor to make it easier to read. Under the MI tab, select [LCD brightness], then press <ei>. With the adjustment screen displayed, press the CAN> > key to adjust the brightness. then press <e>. When checking the exposure of an image, set the LCD monitor brightness to 4 and prevent the ambient light from affecting the reviewed image. LCD trprin LCD offion In Sits% tit twefilme 0Vau'll 1310 S 167 EFTA01126364 Handy Feares cala Creating and Selecting a Folder You can freely create and select the folder where the captured Images are to be saved. This is optional since a folder will be created automatically for saving captured images. Create a Folder samajap - (neer 1•C• del Select [Select folder]. • Under the In tab. select (Select folder). then press <e>. 2 Select [Create folder]. • Select [Create folder). then press <e>. 3 Create a new folder. • Select (On then press c®>. ► A new folder with a higher one-up folder number is created. 168 EFTA01126365 Haney Features Folder name Highest file number Selecting a Folder Lowest file number • With the folder selection screen Number of images displayed, select a folder and press in folder CS>. ► The folder where the captured images will be saved is selected. • Subsequent captured Images will be recorded Into the selected folder. About Folders As with '100CANOW for example, the folder name starts with three digits (folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A folder can contain up to 9999 images (file No. 0001 - 9999). When a folder becomes full, a new folder wall a higher one-up folder number is created automatically. Also. if manual reset (p.171) is executed, a new folder will be created automaticaly. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can be created. Creating Folders with a Personal Computer With the card open on the screen. create a new folder named VCIW. Open the OCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and organize your images. The folder name must follow the • 100A8C_D* format where the first three digits is 100 - 999 followed by five alphanumeric characters. The five characters can be a combination of upper- or lower-case letters from A to Z. numerals. and an underscore There can be no space in the folder name. Also. folder names cannot have the same tIveri-digit number such as -100ABC and '100W_XYZ' even f the letters are different. 169 EFTA01126366 Handy Features OMB File Numbering Methods The image files will be numbered from 0001 to 9999 in the order the images are taken. then saved in a folder. You can change how the file number is assigned. The file number will appear on your computer in this format: IMG_0001.JPG. Under the IV) tab, select [File numbering], then press <O>. The available settings are described below. Select one, then press <e>. • [Continuous': The file numbering continues In sequence even after you replace the card or create a folder. Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the file numbering continues in sequence up to 9999. This is convenient when you want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 in multiple cards or folders into one folder in your personal computer. If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images might continue from the file numbering of the existing images in the card or folder. If you want to use continuous file numbering, you should use a newly-formatted card each time. File numbering after replacing the card Canal O • -- XxX•Oosi -, Next sequential file number File numbering after creating a folder 170 EFTA01126367 Handy Features • [Auto reset]: The Me numbering Is reset to 0001 whenever you replace the card or create a folder. Whenever the card is replaced or a new folder created, the file numbering starts from 0001. This is convenient if you want to organize images according to cards or folders. If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images might continue from the file numbering of the existing images in the card or folder. If you want to save images with the file numbering starting from 0001, use a newly formatted card each time. File numbering after File numbering after replacing the card creating a folder Carthl 1 010 xXx.0)(51 0I )01 File numbering is reset • [Manual reset]: To reset the file numbering to 0001 manually or to start from file number 0001 in a new folder. When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder starts from 0001. This is convenient if you want to use different folders for the images taken yesterday and the ones taken today, for example. After the manual reset, the file numbering retums to continuous or auto reset. (There will be no Manual reset confirmation screen.] If the file number in folder No. 999 reaches 9999. shooting will not be possible even if the card sta has storage capacity. The LCD monitor will display a message telling you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card. For both JPEG and RAW images. the fee name will start with "IMG_'. Movie file names will start with The extension wal be '.JPG' for JPEG images. ".CRY for RAW images. and'. MVP for movies. 171 EFTA01126368 Handy Fearea 693[0 Setting Copyright Information * When you set the copyright information. it will be appended to the image as Exit information. CCOnt, o'Derntrtm - inn .4111-0 1117 N NV .O.J::i711000121:1 1 aa abc raldSt Imam nu ABCOUGNIMINOPONS Z ..lair 'IP INNICatail INNOC 1 Select [Copyright information]. • Under the [VI tab, select [Copyright information[. then press <61 >. 2 Select the option to be set. • Select [Enter authors name] or (Enter copyright details), then press ce>. I. The text entry screen will appear. • Select [Display copyright info.] to check the copyright information currently set. • Select [Delete copyright information) to delete the copyright information currently set. Enter text. • Refer to "Text Entry Procedure" on the next page and enter the copyright information. • Enter up to 63 alphanumeric characters and symbols. Exit the setting. • After entering the text, press the <MENU> button to exit. 1/2 EFTA01126369 Handy Features Text Entry Procedure ausrseditsisae snit mound Ills) •••_/::I7(11)O0I1345,, abcollefehlitIoneoirstuwo.,: AlICDEFOILIESOFORSTOvvi rl • 1.•414'•(}+ ec.nc.. (MIKIS • Changing the entry area: Press the <ill> button to toggle between the top and bottom entry areas. • Moving the cursor: Press the <411w> key to move the cursor. • Entering text: In the bottom area, press the <4> key or turn the CS> dial to select a character, then press ce> to enter it. • Deleting a character: Press the <'j> button to delete one character. • Exiting: After entering the text, press the <MENU> button to finalize the text entry and return to the screen in step 2. • Canceling the text entry: To cancel the text entry, press the <INFO.> button and the screen in step 2 will reappear. 11 You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utinty (provided software. p 302) 173 EFTA01126370 Handy Feares ci MED Auto Rotation of Vertical Images Vertical images are rotated automatically so they are displayed vertically on the camera's LCD monitor and on the personal computer instead of horizontally. The setting of this feature can be changed. Auto rows 1 rlm Under the [V] tab. select [Auto rotate]. then press <e>. The available settings are described below. Select one, then press <Oa% • [Ono 3f]: The vertical image is automatically rotated during playback on both the camera's LCD monitor and on the computer. • [One] : The vertical Image is automatically rotated only on the computer. • [Oft] : The vertical Image is not automatically rotated. LI FAQ • The vertical Image is not rotated during the Image review immediately after it Is captured. Press the <E> button and the image playback will display the rotated image. • [Ones ] is set, but the Image does not rotate during playback. Auto rotate will not work with vertical images captured while [Auto rotate] was set to [Off]. If the vertical Image is taken white the camera is pointed up or down, the image might not be rotated automatically for playback. In such a case, see "Rotating the Image" on page 205. • On the camera's LCD monitor, I want to rotate an Image captured when [One) had been set. Set [Ones 0]. then playback the image. It will be rotated. • The vertical Image does not rotate on the computer screen. The software used is not compatible with image rotation. Use the software provided with the camera instead. 174 EFTA01126371 Handy Features INFO. Checking Camera Settings Mile the shooting settings (pA7) are displayed. press the <INF0.> but on to display the camera's major (unction settings. Settings display Freespace Color space sRGB WB Shift/BKT 0.0/±0 Live View shoot. Enable ID Enable e Disable 6 30 sec. oOnO. Enable 2011/02/213 13:30: — Card remaining capacity — Color space (p.121) — WB correction (p.119)/ WB bracketing (p.120) L Live View shooting (p.123) — Red-eye reduction (p.91) Auto rotate display (p.174) L Date/ Time (p.34) L_ Beeper (p.166) Auto power off (p.167) Sensor cleaning (p.184) 175 EFTA01126372 Handy Feattres ens Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings * The camera's shooting settings and menu settings can be reverted to the default. This option is available in Creative Zone modes. Select [Clear settings]. • Under the Itil tab. select [Clear settings], then press <e>. 7tTrti•Y* OW I I COW* OW a GINN, FMK K FM) CANA (Mw S <antra seterqs Ca-cti 2 Select [Clear all camera settings]. • Select [Clear all camera settings] then press <FT; >. 3 Select [OK]. • Select [OKI. then press CS>. ► Setting [Clear all camera settings] will reset the camera to the default settings on the next page. ? FAQ • Clearing all camera settings: After the procedure above, select [Clear ad Custom Pune. (C.Fn)] in [t Clear settings] to clear all the Custom Function settings (p.250). 176 EFTA01126373 Handy Features Shooting Settings AF mode One-Shot AF AF point selection Automatic selection Drive mode 0 (Single shooting) Cia (Evaluative Metering mode metering) ISO speed AUTO (Auto) ISO Auto Max.: 3200 Exposure compensation/AEB Canceled Built-In flash func. setting NormalFiring Flash exposure compensation 0 (Zero) Custom Functions Unchanged Camera Settings Auto power off 30 sec. Beep Enable Release shutter without card Enable Image review 2 sec. Histogram Brightness Image jump verin 1 (10 images) Auto rotate Onel . LCD brightness * ....4....... LCD ofilon button Shutter button Date/Time Unchanged Language Unchanged Video system Unchanged Feature guide Enable Copyright information Unchanged Bass boost Usable Control over HDMI Usable Eye-Fl transmission Disable My Menu settings Unchanged Image-recording Settings Quality AL Picture Style Auto Auto Lighting Standard Optimizer Peripheral Enable/ Illumination Correction date correction retained Color space sRG8 White balance ED (Auto) Custom white balance Canceled WB correction Canceled WB-BKT Canceled File numbering Continuous Auto cleaning Enable Dust Delete Data Erased 177 EFTA01126374 Handy FeatureS Live View Shooting Settings Live View shooting Enable AF mode Live mode Grid display Oft Aspect ratio 3:2 Metering timer 16 sec. Movie Shooting Settings Movie exposure Auto AF mode Live mode AF wi shutter button during le Disable IllShuttedAE lock button AF/AE lock Remote control Disable IllIlighligM tone priority Disable Movie recording size 1920O080 Sound recording Auto Metering timer 16 sec. Grid display Oft Video snapshot Disable Exposure compensation Canceled Auto Lighting Optimizer slam:lard Custom white balance Canceled Picture Style Auto 178 EFTA01126375 Handy reilltUreS isam Turning the LCD Monitor Off/On The shooting settings display (p.47) can be turned on or off by pressing the shutter button halfway. Under the WI tab. select (LCD off/on bin]. then press <s". The available settings are described below. Select one. then press .ce>. • [Shutter btn.] : When you press the shutter button halfway. the display will turn off. And when you let go of the shutter button, the display will turn on. • [Shutter/DISP]: When you press the shutter button halfway. the display will turn off. And when you let go of the shutter button, the display will remain off. To turn on the display, press the <DISP.> button. • [Remains on] : Display remains on even when you press the shutter button halfway. To turn off display. press the <DISP.> button. ams Changing the Shooting Settings Screen Color You can change the background color of the shooting settings screen. Under the In tab. select (Screen color]. then press <8 >. Select the desired color, then press <c p.. When you exit the menu, the selected color will be displayed for the shooting settings screen. p 1/125 f5.6 13 100 sawn maw • 1 3 P via ••• a One n A ,m ( Inn c.c 1. a CC IL ( 514)1 • 179 EFTA01126376 [Flash firing] MENU Setting the Flash* The built-in flash and external Speedlite settings can be set with the camera's menu. You can use the camera's menu to set the external Speedlite function settings only if the attached EX-series Speedlite is compatible with this function. The setting procedure is the same as setting a camera menu function. Select [Flash control]. • Under the (0.) tab, select [Flash control]. then press <e>. • The flash control screen will appear. • Normally, set this to (Enable). • If [Disable] is set, neither the built- in flash nor the external Speedlite will fire. This is useful when you only want to use the flash's AF-assist beam. E-TTL II Metering Modes • For normal flash exposures. set this to (Evaluative). • (Average) is for advanced users. As with an external Speedlite. the metering area is averaged. Flash exposure compensation may be necessary. Even if [Flash firing) has been set to [Disable]. if focus is difficult to achieve in low fight the built-in flesh may still fire a series of flashes (AF-assist beam, p.86). 180 EFTA01126377 co SeMeg the Flat ° [Built-in flash func. setting] and [External flash func. setting] With (Built-In flash func. setting] and [External flash func. setting]. you can set the functions listed in the table below. The functions displayed under tExternal flash fume. setting] will vary depending on the Speedlite model. nab caws Nth tang (fable (-111. I NtW Evidathe 140,-on "ash fLtc wont &tem* Ha Suns see" Faissnal Flash C in slam (kw at Rath C in set • Select [Built-In flash func. setting] or [External flash func. setting]. IP. The flash functions will be displayed. The functions not dimmed can be selected and set. [Built-in flash func. setting] and [External flash func. setting] Settable Functions Function (Built-In flash func. setting] [External flashfunc. setting] Page Normal Firing Easy Wireless (p.191) Custom Wireless (p.194) Flash mode - — ._. 182 Shutter sync. C) o 182 FEB' o Wireless flash O O 189 Channel O O O 191 Flash group O 195 Flash exposure compensation O O O o 104 Zoom' o ' For [FEB) (Flash exposure bracketing) and [Zoom]. refer to the SpeedItters instruction manual. 181 EFTA01126378 MI Seeing the Flash • Shutter sync. Normally, set this to [1st curtain] so that the flash fires immediately after the exposure starts. If (2nd curtain) is set, the flash will fire right before the exposure ends. When this is combined with a slow sync speed, you can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night. With 2nd-curtain sync, a preflash is fired when you press the shutter button completely. This is to determine the exposure. Then immediately before the exposure ends, the real flash is fired. Therefore, two flashes will be fired. However, with shutter speeds faster than 1/30 sec.. 1st curtain sync will automatically take effect. If an external Speedlite is attached, you can also set [HI-speed) (S it). For details. see the Speedlite's instruction manual. • Wireless flash See 'Wireless Flash Photography' on page 189. • Flash exposure compensation See "I38 Flash Exposure Compensation' on page 104. • Flash mode You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shooting. • (E-TTL II) is the standard mode of EX-series Speedlites for automatic flash shooting. • (Manual flash) is for advanced users who want to set the (Flash output) (1/1 to 11128) themselves. • Regarding other flash modes, refer to your Speedlite's instruction manual. lEt.it -in 11r.r. fum wino rum intot. 'Ant Mn 4.11111. • Extimehi flash how ser:ri; Manual rash mum flasn RE kixErflath Man Enflash Ea Ow 40 set s 182 EFTA01126379 IMEll Setting the Flash • Clear flash settings With the [Built-In flash tune. setting] or [External flash tune. setting] screen displayed, press the <INFO.> button to display the screen to clear the flash settings. When you select [01q, the settings for the flash will be cleared. Setting the External Speedlite Custom Functions The Custom Functions displayed under [External flash C.Fn setting] will vary depending on the Speedlite model. Display the Custom Function. • With the camera ready to shoot with an external Speedlite. select [External flash C.Fn setting], then press Ce>. rcrt.o, nem leing Enable 1-111. E meter Eviiwtne axe-in flan fin setting External NO tun( setro (+lend ( In tettn) Cleat tat navicrn set • Extermi tiashcrn weep Auto 00vrer an Enatial I Disatred 2 Set the Custom Function. • Press the <AMP.> key to select the function number, then set the function. The procedure is the same as setting the camera's Custom Functions (p.250). • To clear all the Custom Function settings, select [Clear ext. flash C.Fn set] in step 1. 183 EFTA01126380 ?o Automatic Sensor Cleaning Whenever you set the power switch to <ON> or <OFF>. the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit operates to automatically shake off the dust on the front of the sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to this operation. However, you can execute the sensor cleaning at anytime as well as disable it. Cleaning the Sensor Now teD offne Si 9& to lanes Warn 330 to froth Video mem •ISC Senior (Wein; /Wive Rode trab'e Select [Sensor cleaning]. • Under the WI tab. select (Sensor cleaning], then press <e>. 2 Select [Clean now:a]. • Select [Clean now ], then press <e>. • Select 1OK1 on the dialog screen. then press <e>. ► The screen will indicate that the sensor is being cleaned. Although there will be a shutter sound. a picture is not taken. • For best results. do the sensor cleaning while the camera bottom is placed on a table or other flat surface. • Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the resit will not improve that much. Right after the sensor cleaning is finished, the (Clean now ) option will remain disabled temporarily. Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning • In step 2. select [Auto cleaning and set it to [Disable). ► The sensor cleaning will no longer be executed when you set the power switch to <ON> or <OFF>. 184 EFTA01126381 MENU Appending Dust Delete Data* Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust that might be visible on captured images. However, in case visible dust still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for erasing the dust spots later. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital Photo Professional (provided software. p.302) to erase the dust spots automatically. Preparation • Get a solid-white object (paper. etc.). • Set the lens focal length to 50mm or longer. • Set the lens focus mode switch to <MF> and set the locus to infinity M. If the lens has no distance scale. look at the front of the lens and turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way. Obtain the Dust Delete Data Fl . Dust Dent Data Oram an '5, ', U., : eau Dan; Whvart Per 10 mend kr orate lost wined 00/03/X0 0000 Circe Ce -t-Elf Sea nanny Select [Dust Delete Data]. • Under the (CC tab. select [Dust Delete Data]. then press <e>. 2 Select [OK]. • Select [OK] and press <C)>. After the automatic self-cleaning of the sensor is performed. a message will appear. Although there will be a shutter sound, a picture is not taken. Dust Nine Ca., Fun; pins tre shutter turzn. isten ready 185 EFTA01126382 eas Appending Dust Date* Data 3 Photograph a solid-white object. • At a distance of 20 cm - 30 cm (0.7 ft. - 1.0 ft.). fill the viewfinder with a patternless. solid-white object and take a picture. ► The picture will be taken in aperture- priority AE mode at an aperture of f/22. • Since the image will not be saved. the data can still be obtained even if theft:, is no card in the camera. ► When the picture is taken, the camera will start collecting the Dust Delete Data. When the Dust Delete Data is obtained, a message will appear. Select (OKI. and the menu will reappear. • If the data was not obtained successfully. a message to that effect will appear. Follow the "Preparation' procedure on the preceding page, then select [On Take the picture again. About the Dust Delete Data After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG and RAW images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, you should update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again. For details about using Digital Photo Professional (provided software. p.302) to erase dust spots, see the Software Instruction Manual (p.304) in the Software Instruction Manual CD-ROM. The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that It hardly affects the image file size. 0 Be are to use a said-white object such as a new sheet of white paper. lithe paper has any pattern or design. it may be recognized as dust data and affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the software. 186 EFTA01126383 EMIg Manual Sensor Cleaning * Dust which could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can be removed manually with a blower. etc. The surface of the Image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to be cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon Service Center is recommended. Before cleaning the sensor, detach the lens from the camera. Fame guide treble Swear aniing Auto deaNno:n. Oen wort, O nanway Ende rem maw* Mpg po OUP Mt .nrilOr Circe 1 Select [Sensor cleaning]. • Undo( the [V] tab, select [Sensor cleaning), then press Ce>. 2 Select [Clean manually]. • Select (Clean manually', then press cei>. 3 Select [O1q. • Select [On then press <ea. ► In a moment. the reflex mirror will lockup and the shutter will open. 4 Clean the sensor. 5 End the cleaning. • Sot the power switch to <OFF>. V • For the power source, using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8 (sold separately) m recommended. • If you use a battery. make sure it is fully recharged. If the battery gnp with size-AAAR6 batteries is attached, manual sensor cleaning will not be possible. 187 EFTA01126384 GM Manual Sensor Clearing * 0 • While cleaning the sensor. never do any of the following. If the power is cut off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains and image sensor might get damaged. • Setting the power switch to <OFF>. • Opening the battery compartment cover. • Opening the card slot cover. • The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor with care. • Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the sensor. • Oo not risen the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If the power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or reflex mirror might get damaged. • Never use canned air or gas to clean the sensor. The blowing force can damage the sensor or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor. • If the battery level becomes low while you dean the sensor. the beeper will sound as a waming. Stop cleaning the sensor. • If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center m recommended. 188 EFTA01126385 Wireless Flash Photography You can use the built-in flash for wireless flash shooting. The camera's built-in flash can work as a master unit wi h Canon Speedlites having a wireless slave feature and wirelessly trigger the Speedlite(s) to fire. Canceling the slave unit's auto power off To cancel the slave units auto power off, press the camera's <*, button. If you are using manual flash firing, press the slave units test firing (PILOT) button to cancel the auto power off. ' Be sure to also read the explanations about viireless flash photography in the Speedhle's ristrucbon manual. EFTA01126386 Using Wireless Flash* Slave Unit Settings and Position Regarding your Speedlite (slave unit). refer to its instruction manual and set it as follows. The settings other than the below for the slave unit's control are all set with the camera. Different types of Canon Speedlite stave units can be used and controlled together. (1) Set the Speedilte as a slave unit. (2) Set the Speedlite's transmission channel to the same one as the camera's." (3) If you want to set the flash ratio (p.196), set the stave unit ID. (4) Position the camera and slave unit(s) within the range shown below. (5) Face the slave unit's wireless sensor toward the camera.'2 Wireless flash set-up example Indoors Outdoors Approx. torn (32.8ft.) 7m Approx.(23.08.) Approx. 5m Approx. 7m (16.48.) (23.0ft.) '1: ll the Speeatle does not nave a transmission channel setting keiction, the camera can work with any channel. '2. In small rooms. the slave unit may work even it its wireleSS sensor does not late the camera. The cameras wireless signals can bOLtiCe 00 the walls and be received by the stave unit. With Ex-series Speedlee having a fixed bash head and wireless sensor. make sure it fires, then take the picture. 190 EFTA01126387 Easy Wireless Flash Shooting M easy. basic. and fully-automatic wireless flash shooting is explained below. Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite Steps 1 to 4 and 6 apply to all wireless flash shooting. Therefore, these steps are omitted in the other wireless flash setups explained on ' the pages hereafter. HT, AI Va.^ P(S.Ite Inc v for.Thjj. (SC PT6 9e •t,e..^. 2 st,. t`e loieta .1 or." (trect 9,e Cracie ^ r . 11-3^.” aevm 'Ott' 'en; Rabe to•-.n , aVi 4rr wing Intro 4sr •J..: Ofte-ra Itatf. ( I - Cleat 1.41 n.c ( cntr Press the <$> button to raise the built-in flash. • For wireless flash shooting. be sure to raise the built-in flash. 2 Select [Flash control]. • Under the (OA tab. select [Flash control]. then press <e>. 3 Select [Evaluative]. • For (E-TTL II meter.). select (Evaluative]. then press <)>. 191 EFTA01126388 Easy Wireless Flash Sh00LOg each oersted Rash Mins Erata I-ITL I meter I ...arts ast-in rum me Set [Memel flash lute. set, : Ire•nal Sash ern seem; Bulk-In Ann lune srmns bat-In mm raSyWelabs Cranne bat -Jr, rash ta-c semns IUM-in flash ame setting j bat-in last Wens/inn, SW sync Ise oiteal 4 Select [Built-in flash func. setting]. • Select [Built-In flash funs. setting]. then press <e>. 5 Select [EasyWircless]. • For [Du i It-in flash]. select lEasyWirelessj. then press <e>. 6 Set [Channel]. • Set the channel (1.4) to the same one as the slave unit. 7 Take the picture. • As with normal flash shooting, you can set the camera and take the picture in the same way. 8 Exit the wireless flash shooting. • For [Bullt•In flash func. setting]. select [NormalFlring] V • Setting [E-TTL Il meter.] to [Evaluative] is recommended. • With (EasyWirelessj. even if you disable the but-in flash from firing. it will still (re to control the slave unit. Depending on shooting conditions. the flash fired to control the slave unit may appear in the pcture. a Firing a lest flash is not possible with the slave unit. 192 EFTA01126389 Easy wireless Flash Shooting Fully-automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites You can have multiple slave units fire as if they were a single Speedlite. Convenient when you need a large flash output. Ear m f,e( rre e] re OranNI I a, Basic settings: Flash mode : E-TTL II E-TTL II meter. : Evaluative Bu flash : EasyWireless Channel : (Same as slave units) All the slave units will fire at the same output and be controlled to obtain a standard exposure. No matter what the stave ID is (A, B. or C). all the slave units will fire as one group. Flash Exposure Compensation If the flash exposure looks too dark or too bright, you can set flash exposure compensation to adjust the slave units' flash output. • Select (Flash exposure compensation). then press <e>. • If the flash exposure is too dark. press the <►> key to increase the flash exposure and make it brighter. If the flash exposure is too bright, press the <4> key to decrease the flash exposure and make it dulcet 193 EFTA01126390 Custom Wireless Flash Shooting Fully-automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite and Built-in Flash Ibit-in Nth hsc serene B...e,n ?ash CtraWeer, FUN MX* (-TR II *Men NIX 11 Channel I ch Pat-In Nth ftec salting Pan-in hash CusiWreen$ Flash el, (-Ili II WINKS fun( Channel I eh •!-In ten Arc. maim Rash male E-711 Ykeless lune Channel I Ch -1 ®Cleat tiro' setters This describes fulhi-automatic wireless flash shooting with one external Speedlite and the built-in flash. You can change the flash ratio between the external Speedlite and built-in flash to adjust how the shadows look on the subject. On the menu screens. the <3.1> and • > Icons refer to the external Speedlite, and the <t> and <S> icons refer to the built-in flash. 11 Select [CustWireless]. • Follow step 5 on page 192 to select (CustWIreless) then press <e>. 2 Select [Wireless func.]. • For [Wireless func.j. select [3•1:5S). then press <F,,>. Set the desired flash ratio and take the picture. • Select [3•C5SI and set the flash ratio within 8:1 to 1:1. Setting a flash ratio to the right of 1:1 (up to 11) is not possible. • If the built-in flash output is not enough, set a higher ISO speed (p.79). The 8:1 to 1:1 flash ratio is equrratent to 3:110 1:1 stops (1/2-stop increments). 194 EFTA01126391 Custom wireless Flash Sheeting Fully-automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites Multiple Speedlite slave units can be treated as one flash unit or separated into slave groups whose flash ratio can be set. The basic settings are shown below. By changing the Wiring group] setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups with multiple Speedidos. ait-in Rash turc steno (uletWe Rita Ma IOntless func Chan* I Ch rein grew SAN (fra. Mph Basic settings: Flash mode : E-TTL II E-TTL II meter. : Evaluative Wireless tunc. : 5.1 Channel : (Same as slave units) [‘All] Using multiple slave Speedlites as one flash unit Convenient when you need a large flash output. All the slave Speedlites will fire at the same output and be controlled to obtain a standard exposure. No matter what the slave ID is (A. B, or C), all the slave units will fire as one group. Set [Firing group] to (% All], then take the picture. i 195 EFTA01126392 Custom Wireless Flash Shooting (A:B)] Multiple slave units in multiple groups Divide the slave units into groups A and B, and change the flash ratio to obtain the desired lighting effect. Refer to your Speedtile's instruction manual to set one slave unit's slave ID to A (Group A) and the other slave unit's ID to B (Group B) and position them as shown in the illustration. kit -WI flash ttne setting Stunt' SY, : mass Mt sit thamil I dl int9 11) !tat -In Ras, tune tattoo A r.unnet erg •q• Aetna* n ' V east flash 1 Select [Wireless func.]. • Follow step 2 on page 194 to select rail. then press <e>. 2 Set [Firing group] to [g (A:B)]. 3 Set the desired flash ratio and take the picture. • Select (A:B fire ratio] and set the flash ratio. [Firing group) is set to re (A:8)1. group C will not fire. The 8:1 to 1:1 to 1:8 flesh ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 to 1:3 stops (1/2- stop increments). 196 EFTA01126393 CUSIOM Wireless Flash Shooting (‘All and Fully-automatic Shooting with the Built-in Flash and Multiple External Speedlites The built-in flash can also be added to wireless flash shooting explained on pages 195-196. The basic settings are shown below. By changing the (Firing group) setting. you can shoot with various wireless flash setups of multiple Speedlites complemented with the built-in flash. 1 Basic settings: Flash mode : E-TTL II ' m:ce , •ri teT ^'D F 11, I E-TTL II meter. : Evaluative IL" Wireless func. : [;%•51i,] CranNI Se's) ccmp 1 ch I y ' 't Channel : (Same as slave units) Select [Firing group]. 2 • Select the firing group, then set the flash ratio, flash exposure compensation, and other necessary settings before shooting. (AS) Al 197 EFTA01126394 Other Settings Flash Exposure Compensation When [Flash mode) is set to (E-TTL III. flash exposure compensation can be set. The flash exposure compensation settings (see below) which can be set will differ depending on the [Wireless tune.] and !Firing group) settings. bilt-In Ruh kr( :non] Innis tn. •n G 1 avD.,m, 1..I.4..I.,2 Thing IMO WI and Si 9,410. =Mk -2- 14- 1 : 2 101110“. nen [Flash exp. comp] • The flash exposure compensation is applied to the built-in flash and all external Speedlites. (S exp. comp.] • The flash exposure compensation is applied to the built-in flash. ['I exp. comp.] • The flash exposure compensation is applied to all external Speedlites. [A,B exp. comp.] • The flash exposure compensation is applied to both groups A and B. FE Lock If [Flash model is set to [E-TTL II]. you can press the <if> button to perform FE lock. 198 EFTA01126395 Olh0r Settings Setting the Flash Output Manually for Wireless Flash When (Flash mode] is set to [Manual flash]. the flash output can be set manually. The flash output settings ri flash output]. [Group A output etc.) that can be set will differ depending on the [Wireless func.] selling (see below). gash lux strong EUR-in flash cwtwtsss I Rao mode 1.Ynw nr.t. %Wass tux Channel I ch nnog grew HMI Clear Nth sett • [Wireless func.: 9.1) • (Firing group: %All]: The manual flash output setting will be applied to all the external Speedlites. • (Firing group: 11 (A:B)]: You can set the flash output separately for slave groups A and B. [Wireless func.: 9.e+ :€3s, • (Firing group: %All and SI The flash output can be set separately for the external Speedlite(s) and built-In flash. • (Firing group: (A:8) 5]: You can set the flash output separately for slave groups A and B. You can also set the flash output for the built-in flash. 199 EFTA01126396 EFTA01126397 9 Image Playback This chapter explains features related to viewing photos and movies, going into more detail than in Chapter 2 "Basic Shooting and Image Playback." Here you will find explanations about how to playback and erase photos and movies with the camera and viewing them on a TV set. About Images taken with another camera: The camera might not he able to property display images captured with a different camera or edited with a computer or whose file name was changed. EFTA01126398 14,71 pur--.T • E Searching for Images Quickly is Display Multiple Images on One Screen (Index display) Search for images quickly with the index display showing four or nine images on one screen 0 1 Playback the image. C • When you press the <E> button. the last image captured will be displayed. 2 Switch to the index display. • Press the <lag > button. 10 The 4-image index display will appear. The currently-selected image will be highlighted in a blue frame. • Press the <E1C1.> button again to switch to the 9-image index display. • Pressing the <O.> button will switch the display between 9 images. 4 Images and one image displayed. 1 imetwiir 3 3 Select an image. • Press the <.>> key to move the blue frame to select an image. • Turning the <IS> dial will display the next screen or previous image. • Press <0> and the selected image will be displayed as a single image. 202 EFTA01126399 ID Searching for Images Chickly OB Jump through Images (Jump display) With the single image display, you can tum the <S> dial to jump through the images forward or back according to the jump method that was set. Jump method Playback position Select [Image jump wwa]. • Under the pa) tab, select [Image Jump win). then press < 2 Select the jump method. • Press the > key to select the Jump method, then press <CI>. fl: Display Images one by one fit: Jump 10 images SI: Jump 100 Images fg: Display by date rei: Display by folder g: Display movies only re: Display stills only /: Display by image rating (p.206) Turn the <ri> dial to select the rating. Browse by jumping. • Press the <E> button to playback images. • On the single-image display, turn the cem> dial. • To search mages according to the shooting date. select Pate). e To search images according to folder. select (Folder). • If the card contains both (Movies) and (Stills), select either one to display only movies or stills. • If no images match the selected (Rating). browsing through the images with <a> is not possible. 203 EFTA01126400 COC1 Magnified View You can magnify a shot image by 1.5x to 10x on the LCD monitor. 1 "ts i r 71 Ote sfili 1 Magnify the image. • During image playback, press the <Q.> button. I> The image will be magnified. • If you hold down the <0.> button, the image will be magnified until it reaches the maximum magnification. • Press the <RA> button to reduce the magnification. If you hold down the button, the magnification will be reduced to the single image display. 2 Scroll around the image. • Use the < .:• > key to scroll around the magnified image. • To exit the magnified display, press the <C I> button and the single image display will return. • You can turn the <nt> dial to view another image while the magnification is maintained. • The image cannot be magnified during the image review immediately after shooting. • A movie cannot be magnified. 204 EFTA01126401 I Rotating the Image You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation. Stows maxi. I t traw mars FYIY. 0.11V CM41.41 fans Sabre alp 1 Select [Rotate]. • under the [El tab, select [Rattle), then press <€0,.. 2 Select an image. • Press the <0.> key to select the image to be rotated. • You can also select an image on the index display (p.202). 3 Rotate the image. • Each time you press <9›, the image will rotate clockwise as follows: 90° 270° 0° • To rotate another image, repeat steps 2 and 3. • To exit and return to the menu, press the <MENU> button. • If you have set It' Auto rotate) to (Orin OP) (p.174) before taking vertical shots. you need not rotate the image as described above. • If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during •-nage playback. set (4. Auto rotate) to (One le). • A movie cannot be rotated. 205 EFTA01126402 MENU Setting Ratings You can rate images and movies with one of five rating marks: 1-3/Et Gigl/C41. rr tait os 1 Select [Rating]. • Under the IM tab, select Mating]. then press <e>. 2 Select an image or movie. • Press the <•40, > key to select an image or movie to be rated. • You can display three images by pressing the <®•Q> button. To return to the single-image display. press the <Q> button. Rate the image or movie. • Press the <0> key to select a rating. O. The total number of images and movies rated will be counted for each rating. • To rate another image or movie. repeat steps 2 and 3. • To exit and return to the menu. press the <MENU> button. 206 EFTA01126403 Setting Ratings j The total number of a rating can be displayed up to 999. If there are 1.000 or more images for a rating, (WWM) veil be displayed. Taking advantage of ratings • With (9' Image Jump vd,e2:4. you can display only the rated images and movies. • With IN3' Slide show). you can playback only the rated images and movies. • With ()vital Photo Professional (provided software. p.302). you can select only the rated images and movies. • With Wridows Vista and Windows 7. you can see the rating with the file nformation display or the provided image viewer. 207 EFTA01126404 g Quick Control During Playback During playback, you can press the <EI> button to set any of the following: [com Protect Images], I® Rotate]. [* Rating]. [1:6 Creative filters], [a Resize (JPEG images only)), and (.1 Image Jump wird. For movies, only the functions In bold above can be set. I Press the <0> button. • During image playback, press the <I D> button. ► The functions satiable with Quick Control will appear on the left of the screen. 2 Select a function and set it. • Press the <0> key to select a function. ► The name and current setting of the selected function are displayed at the bottom. • Set it by pressing the <4►> key. • For Creative filters and Resize, press cei> and set the function. For details, see page 230 for Creative filters and page 233 for Resize. To cancel, press the <MENU> button. 3 Exit the setting. • Press the cal> button to turn off the Quick Control icons and function settings. 0 To rotate an image. set (t* Auto rotate) to (On OE). If (V Auto rotate) is set to (On IR) or (Off). the (in Rotate) setting will be recorded to the image. but the camera will not rotate the image for. display. 208 EFTA01126405 Oulck Control Dieing Playback • Pressing the <III> button during the index display will switch to the single-image display and the Cluck Contra icons will appear. Pressing the CI> button again will return to the index display. • For images taken with another camera. selectable funaions may be irnited. 209 EFTA01126406 1. Enjoying Movies Basically, you can playback movies in the following three ways: Playback on a TV set (p.218.221) Use the provided AV cable or an HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) to connect the camera to a TV set. Then you can playback the captured movies and still photos on the TV. If you have a High-Definition TV set and connect your camera with an HDMI cable, you can watch Full High-Definition (Full HD: 1920x1080) and High- Definition (HD: 1280x720) movies with higher image quality. 40 • Movies on a card can be played only by devices compatible with MOV files. • Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN temknal. the camera cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable. • Even if the camera is connected to a hard disk recorder with a USB cable. movies and still photos cannot be played nor saved. Playback on the Camera's LCD Monitor (p.212-217) out the movie's first and last scenes. and playback the images and movies in the card in an automatic slide show. You can playback movies on the camera's LCD monitor. You can also edit 0 A movie edited with a personal computer cannot be rewritten to the card and played back with the camera. However, video snapshot albums edited with Zoom8rowser EX/ImageSrowser (provided software) can be played on the camera. 210 EFTA01126407 'W Enjoying Movies Playback and Editing with a Personal Computer (See the PDF file instruction manual for Zoondkowser EXilrnageBrowser. p.3O0) The movie files recorded in the card can be transferred to a personal computer and played or edited with ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser (provided software. p.3O2). You can also extract a single frame from a movie and save it as a still photo. U i0 • To have the movie playback smoothly on a personal computer. use a high-performance personal computer. Regarding the computer hardware requirements for ZoomBrowser EXArnageBrovner. see the PDF file intructian manual. • If you want to use commercially-available software to p4ayback or edit the movies. be sure it is compatible with MOV files. For details on commercially-available software. inquire the software maker. 211 EFTA01126408 'RI Playing Movies tiN 1 Playback the image. • Press the <a> button to display images. .1 7 -t rirwrm2 fell - To 0, .03 ! Pr 7 0: a 3 4 Select a movie. • Press the <An.> key to select a movie. • On the single-image display, the <T, In> icon displayed on the upper left indicates a movie. If the movie is a video snapshot, <Fa OH> will be displayed. • You can press the <INFO., button to switch the shooting information display (p.227). • On the index display, the perforation on the left edge ol the image indicates a movie. As movies cannot be played on the Index display, press Cg, to switch to the single•image display. On the single-image display. press <@>. • The movie playback panel will appear on the bottom. Playback the movie. • Select (*) (Play), then press <€0,.. I, The movie will start playing. • You can pause the movie playback by pressing <0›. • During movie playback, you can turn the <rTh> dial to adjust the built-in speaker's sound volume. • For more details on the playback procedure. see the next page. 212 EFTA01126409 YI Playing Movies Function Playback Description M Exit Returns to the seigle.image display. ill• Play Pressing Ce, toggles between play and stop. Ili, Slow motion Adjust the slow motion speed by pressing the <0> key. The slow-motion speed is indicated on the upper right. IN First frame Displays the movie's first frame. iii previous frame Each time you press <e>. a single previous frame is displayed. If you hold down <e>. it will rewind the movie. IN Next frame Each time you press <e>, the movie will play frame-by- frame. If you hold down <e>, it will fast forward the movie. PI Last frame Displays the movie's last frame. Edit Displays the editing screen (p.214). Background music* Playback a movie with the selected background music (p.217). Playback position mat' ss" Playback tine (minutes:seconds) I Volume You can adjust the built-in speaker's (p.212) sound valtrne by turning the <a> dial. ' When a backgiand music is set. the Wands Mudd wel not be played. CM Bass Boost This makes low-pitched bass tones easier to hear. This function takes effect only when playing back sound with the camera's built-in speaker. • Set (9: Bass boost) to (Enable]. If the sound crackles, you should set (Bass boost) to (Disable). • With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E8. the continuous playback time will be approx. 2 hr. 30 min. at 23°G73°F. • If you took a still photo while you shot the movie. the still photo will be displayed for approx. 1 sec. during the movie playback. 213 EFTA01126410 SC Editing a Movie's First and Last Scenes r You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in 1-sec. increments. leiwomial 2 3 On the movie playback screen, select [X]. lo The editing screen will be displayed. Specify the part to be edited out. • Select either DiCt) (Cut beginning) or [Cit[ (Cut end), then press CS>. • Press the <AM.> key to see the previous or next frames. Holding it down will last lorward the frames. • After deciding which part to edit out, press <(€)>. The portion highlighted in blue on the top of the screen is what will remain. Check the edited movie. • Select [Ito ] and press <9> to playback the portion highlighted in blue. • To change the editing, go back to step 2. • To cancel the editing, select (5) and press <(€)>. Save the movie. • Select [[3) then press Ce>. It. The save screen will appear. • To save it as a new movie, select [New Me]. To save it and overwrite the original movie file, select [OverwrIte). Then press <C)>. V • Snce the editing is done in 1-sec. increments (posoon ndcated by RIC)). the exact position where the movie is °cited may rider sIgIty from the position you spoofed. • If the card does not have enough room. (New the) will not be selectable. • Mae movie editing functions are evadable with ZoomBrowser EX/ ImageBrowser (provided software. p.302). 214 EFTA01126411 MB Slide Show (Auto Playback) You can playback the images in the card as an automatic slide show. Histogram ISOM WV Mewls 11 1 %situ of images lc ae p.ayM 2 Slat %row 411 ilk a 46 males kw mn *Sake MOOS *11 10 Lb, C., 1 Select [Slide show]. • Under the MI tab, select [Slide show], then press <CD>. Select the images to be played. • Press the <AY> key to select the desired option. then press <©>. [All images/Movies/Stills] • Press the <AY> key to select one of the following: [OM Images! MovlesloStals]. Then press <el>. [Date/Folder/Rating] • Press the <AY> key to select one of the following: [linDateineolded Rating]. • When Co 0> is highlighted. press the <INF0.> button. • Press the <AY> key to select the desired option. then press <e>. Item Playback Description OAS images AS the still photos and movies in the card will be played back. atIlDate Still photos and movies taken on the selected shooting date will be played back. al Folder Still photos and navies in the selected folder will be played back. ',Movies Only the movies in the card will be played back. lellStills Only the still photos in the card will be played back. * Rating Only the still photos and movies with the selected rating will be played back. • 215 EFTA01126412 ERB Slide Show (Auto Playback) I • 3 [Display ems) Set [Set up] as desired. • Press the <AY> key to select [Set up]. then press co>. • Set the [Display time] (still photos), [Repeat], [Transition effect], and [Background music]. • The background music selection procedure is explained on the next page. • After selecting the settings, press the <MENU> button. [Repeat] 216 EFTA01126413 WEI Side Show (Auto Playback) 4 Start the slide show. • Press the <AT> key to select [Start]. then press <ia>. • After [Loading Image...] is displayed. the slide show will start. 5 Quit the slide show. • To quit the slide show and return to the setting screen, press the <MENU> button. Selecting the Background Music • Set [Background music] to [On], then press <ED>. • Press the <AT > key to select the desired background music then press <CD>. You can also select multiple background musics. • To hear a sample of a background music, press the <INFO.> button. Press the <0> key to listen to another background music. To stop listening to the background music, press the <INFO.> button again. Adjust the sound volume by fuming the <S' dial. • After selecting the setting. press the <MENU> button. To pause the slide show. press <la>. During pause. (NJ will be displayed on the upper lea of the image. Press <0> again to resume the slide show. During auto playback. you can press the <INF0.> button to change he still photo display format (p.71). During movie playback. you can adjust the sound volume by turning the <e33> dial. During pause. you can press the <aim.> key to view another image. During the slide show. auto power off wil not take effect The display time may vary depending on the image. To view the slide show on a TV set, see pages 218. Upon purchase. the camera is not set for selecting the background music. You must first use EOS Utility (provided software) to copy the background music to the card. For deta/s. see the EOS Utility Instruction Manual in the CD-ROM. 217 EFTA01126414 Viewing the Images on TV You can view the still photos and movies on a TV set. 0 • Adjust the movie's sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume cannot be adjusted with the camera. • Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and television, turn off the camera and TV set. • Depending on the TV set, part of the image displayed might be cut off. Viewing on HD (High-Definition) TV Sets HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is required. Connect the HDMI cable to the camera. • With the plug's <•HDMI MINI> logo facing the front of the camera. insert it Into the <HDMI OUT> terminal. Connect the HDMI cable to the TV set. • Connect the HDMI cable to the TV's HDMI IN port. 3 Turn on the TV and switch the N's video input to select the connected port. 4 Set the camera's power switch to <ON>. 218 EFTA01126415 Viewing the Images on TV 5 Press the CID> button. ► The image will appear on the TV screen (Nothing will be displayed on the camera's LCD monitor). • The images MI automatically be displayed at the TV's optimum resolution. • By pressing the <INFO.> button, you can change the display format. • To playback movies, see page 212. dill • Do not connect any other device's output to the camera's <HDMI OUT> terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction. • Certain TVs might not be able to playback the captured images. In such a case. use the provided AV cable to connect to the N. • The camera's < A/V OUT > terminal and <HDMI OUT> temsnal cannot be used at the same time. Using HDMI CEC TV Sets If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible with HDMI GEC'. you can use the N set's remote control for playback operations. ' An HDMI-standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that you can control them with one remote control unst. I Set [CM over HDMI] to [Enable]. • Under the IM tab, select [CM over HDMI). then press <(€)>. • Select (Enable), then press <CI>. 2 Connect the camera to a TV set. • Use an HDMI cable to connect the camera to the TV. • The N's input will switch automatically to the HDMI port connected to the camera. 219 EFTA01126416 Viewing the Images on TV 3 Press the camera's <a> button. lk An image will appear on the TV screen and you can use the TV's remote control to playback images. 4 Select an image or movie. • Point the remote control toward the TV set and press the —/— button to select an image. Still photo playback menu 5 Press the remote control's Enter El I ;; INFO button. 0. The menu appears and you can do Movie playback menu INFO left. playback operations shown on the left. • : Return tae : 9-image index • : Play movie • : Slide show INFO.: Disp. shooting info • : Rotate • Press the —f— button to select the desired option. then press the Enter button. For a slide show, press the remote control's tfl button to select an option, then press the Enter button. • If you select (Return) and press the Enter button, the menu will disappear and you can use the —f— button to select an image. .1] • Some TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection. For details, see the TV set's instruction manual. • Certain TV sets, even those compatible with HDMI CEC. may not operate properly. In such a case. disconnect the HDMI cable, set (9 CU! over HDMI) to (Disable). and use the camera to control the playback operation. 220 EFTA01126417 Viewing the Images on TV Viewing on Non-HD (High-Definition) TV Sets Connect the provided AV cable to the camera. • With the plug's <Canon> logo lacing the back of the camera, insert It into the < AN OUT> terminal. I-42 Connect the AV cable to the TV Of set. ® L • Connect the AV cable to the Ws video IN terminal and audio IN O MO terminal. 3 Turn on the TV and switch the N's video input to select the connected port. Set the camera's power switch to <0N>. Press the <CI> button. l• The image will appear on the TV screen (Nothing will be displayed on the camera's LCD monitor). • To playback movies, see page 212. 4 5 • Do not use any AV cable other than the one provided. Images might not be displayed if you use a different cable. • If the video system format does not match the TVs. the images will not be displayed properly. Set the proper video system format with (4" Video system]. 221 EFTA01126418 El Protecting Images Protecting an image prevents it from being erased accidentally. CM Protecting a Single Image n-Proted urtatt: Select rnions At imagas in fader Unpictect all aniges n foot( AS imItti On card Unprotett NI axon on cad Image protect icon Select [Protect images'. • Under the WI tab, select (Protect images], then press <s>. • The protect setting screen will appear. 2 Select [Select images]. • Select [Select Images], then press <n> Protect the image. • Press the <•40, > key to select the image to be protected. then press <e>. O. When an image is protected. the <O> icon will appear on the top of the screen. • To cancel the image protection. press <5> again. The <9> icon will disappear. • To protect another image. repeat step 3. • To exit the image protection. press the <MENU> button. The menu will reappear. 222 EFTA01126419 9 Protecting Images 1219 Protecting All Images in a Folder or Card You can protect all the images in a folder or card at one time. When you select (All Images In folder) or [All Images on card) In [a. Protect Images], all the Images in the folder or card will be protected. To cancel the image protection. select lUnprotect all Images in folder] or Illnprotect all images on card] «Protect urnape. SAKI Imps I AB 'mei In fold, Unprotect AY Images n 'oda All Inagn On cad UnpirAect As lemon to rand =at 0 If you format the card (p.45), the protected images will also be erased. • Movies can also be protected. • Once an image is protected. rt cannot be erased by the camera's erase function. To erase a protected image. you must first cancel the protection. • If you erase all the images (p.225). only the protected images vas remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images all at once. 223 EFTA01126420 Erasing Images You can either select and erase images one by one or erase them in one batch. Protected images (p.222) will not be erased. 0 Once an Image Is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no longer need the image before erasing It. To prevent important Images from being erased accidentally, protect them. Erasing a CM +I L Image will erase both the am and IL Images. Erasing a Single Image 2 Playback the image to be erased. Press the <11p button. ► The erase dialog will appear at the bottom of the screen. 3 Erase the images. • Select (Erase). then press c(E)>. The Image displayed will be erased. Checkmarking <J> Images to be Erased in a Batch By checkrnarking the images to be erased, you can erase multiple images at one time. Select [Erase images]. • Under the (El tab, select [Erase Images], then press ce> 224 EFTA01126421 b Erasing Images 2 Select [Select and erase images]. • Select [Select and erase Images]. then press Ce>. ► The images will be displayed. • To display the three-image display. press the <act, button. To return to the single-image display, press the cq> button. 3 Select the images to be erased. • Press the <Ale.> key to select the image to be erased, then press the <AT> key. ► A <V> checkmark will be displayed on the upper left. • To select other images to be erased, repeat step 3. 4 Erase the images. • Press the <b> button. • Select [OK], then press <e>. ► The selected images will be erased. ME Erasing All Images In a Folder or Card You can erase all the images in a folder or card at one time. When [D' Erase Images] is set to [All Images In folder] or [All Images on card]. all the images in the folder or card will be erased. To also erase protected images. format the card (p.05). 225 EFTA01126422 INFO. Shooting Information Display Sample Image Taken in a Creative Zone Mode Exposure compensation amount Flash exposure compensation amount Aperure Pro:ect Rating Folder minter - File number Shutter speed Metenng mode Shooting mode White balance Image-recording quality 1/125 8:0 0- h 4 1 1 1 _ S . , I00-0332 P Llg 2/3 401- . rld OA2.01 gg3. 0. 0. 0 Aga 24. IA8 003 12/18 'R02/28/2011 13:30:00 Playback nu-nberf I Total images recorded Eye-Fi transmission Histogram (Brightness/ROB) icture Style/Settings ISO speed -Highlight tone priority Color space -Shootkig date and time White balance correction File size ' With an • IL images, the 00 Me size is displayed. ' For still photos taken in movie shooting mode. <IP, will be displayed. 'H a Creative filter or Resize has been applied to the image. the <2594> icon will change to Photos taken with flash without any flash exposure compensation are marked with the <0> icon. Photos taken with flash exposure compensation are marked with the <fa> tan. 226 EFTA01126423 IPIFO. Shcobng Information Display Sample Image Taken in a Basic Zone Mode Shooting mode I/125 8 0 ICO-lit . Nowa dr, C₹J DF.400 24 5.1lB Vied eta Daylight 12/18 02/28/2011 13 30 00 Ambience and ambience effects L.ghttig or scene ' For images taken in Basic Zone modes. the infcimaticn displayed differ depending on the shooting mode. ' Photos taken in the <I2), mode vnll show (Background blur). Sample Movie Taken in Movie Mode Shooting brae Movie/Playback Movie shooting mode Recording system El; S S CC, C' LtNi..31.7 CS IF 02'2S 20'i 13 33 Movie recording Frame rate Size Shutter speed and aperture for movie shooting Movie file size ' If manual exposure was used, the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed (when set manually) wdl be displayed. • The <le, icon vnll be displayed for a video snapshot. 227 EFTA01126424 INFO. Sheeting Information Deploy • About the Highlight Alert When the shootiv information is displayed, any overexposed areas of the image will blink. To obtain more image detail in the overexposed areas, set the exposure compensation to a negative amount and shoot again. • About the Histogram The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and overall brightness. The RGB histogram is for checking the color saturation and gradation. The display can be switched with In' Histogram). [Brightness] Display This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of the image's brightness level. The horizontal axis indicates the brightness level (darker on the left and brighter on the right). while the vertical axes indicates how many pixels exist for each brightness level. The more pixels there are toward the left, the darker the image. And the more pixels there are toward the right. the brighter the image. If there are too many pixels on the left. the shadow detail MI be lost. And if there are too many pixels on the right. the highlight detail will be lost The gradation in-between will be reproduced. By checking the image and its brightness histogram. you can see the exposure level inclination and the overall gradation. (RGB] Display This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary colors brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue). The horizontal axis ildicates the color's brightness level (darker on the left and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates how many pixels exist for each color brightness level. The more pixels there are toward the left, the darker and less prominent the color. And the more pixels there are toward the right, the brighter and denser the color. If there are too many pixels on the left, the respective color information will be lacking. And if there are too many pixels on the right, the color will be too saturated with no detail. By checking the image's RGB histogram, you can see the colors saturation and gradation condition and white balance inclination. Sample Histograms Clark image Ask Normal Onghtness sco t imago 228 EFTA01126425 10 Post-Processing Images After shooting, you can apply Creative fillers or resize the images (downsize the pixel count). Ili • It may not be possible to process images shot with a different camera. • Post-processing images as descnbed in this chapter cannot be done while the camera is connected to a personal computer via the <DIGITAL> terminal. EFTA01126426 Creative Filters You can apply the following Creative filters to an image and save it as a new image: Grainy B/W, Soft focus, Fish-eye effect, Toy camera effect. and Miniature effect. 1 Select [Creative filters]. • Under the ] tab. select !Creative filters]. then press CS>. I> The images will be displayed. 2 Select an image. • Select the image you want to apply a filter to. • By pressing the <RA> button, you can switch to the index display and select an image. 3 Select a filter. • When you press <e>. the Creative filters will be displayed. • For details on Creative filter characteristics, see page 232. • Press the <111.> key to select a filter. then press <e>. • The image applied with the respective filter will be displayed. A. 4 Adjust the filter effect. • Press the <AI.> key to adjust the filter effect, then press <5>. gor • • For the Miniature effect. press the <0> key and select the image area (within the white frame) where you want the image to look sharp. Then press <CD>. 230 EFTA01126427 Creative Filters 5 Save the image. • Select (OK) to save the image. • Note the destination folder and Image file number, then select (OK). • To apply a filter to another image. repeat steps 2 to 5. • To exit and return to the menu. press the <MENU> button. With MS ar glataL images. the MB rnage will be applied with the Creative filter and saved as a JPEG image. It an aspect ratio has been set for Live View shooting and a Creative Star is applied to the OE image, the image will be saved in the aspect ratio that was set. 231 EFTA01126428 Creative AMES Creative Filter Features • Grainy B/W Makes the image grainy and black and white. By adjusting the contrast, you can change the black-and-white effect. • / Soft focus Gives the image a soft look. By adjusting the blur, you can change the degree of softness. • a Fish-eye effect Gives the effect of a fish-eye lens. The image will have a barrel-type distortion. Depending on the level of this filter effect, the area trimmed along the periphery of the image changes. Also. since this filter effect will magnify the image center, the apparent resolution at the center may degrade depending on the number of recorded pixels. So in step 4. set the filter effect while checking the resulting image. • n3) Toy camera effect Gives a color cast typical of toy cameras and darkens the image's fours corners. By adjusting the color tone, you can change the color cast. • A Miniature effect Creates a diorama effect. You can change where the image looks sharp. In step 4. you can press the <INFO.> button to change the orientation (vertical horizontal) of the white frame that shows where you want the image to look sharp. 232 EFTA01126429 EJ Resize You can resize an image to make the pixel count lower and save it as a new Image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG L/M/S1/S2 images. JPEG $3 and RAW images cannot be resized. , - Pane ene rripe$ Pin ado Cream* Inn I htwe 4E. rt. ICU .14!•6171,4 7-.2 Uu • Al SI 51"' $3 Target saes Select [lionize]. • Under the (a'l tab, select (Realzel, then press <e>. I. The images will be displayed. 2 Select an image. • Select the image you want to resize. • By pressing the <IS2.0.> button. you can switch to the index display and select an image. Select the desired image size. • Press <i;;D> to display the image sizes. • Press the <4.> key to select the desired Image size, then press <e>. Save the image. • Select [OK) to save the image. • Note the destination folder and image file number, then select [OK). • To resize another image, repeat steps 2 to 4. • To exit and return to the menu. press the <MENU> button. • 233 EFTA01126430 a Ross. Resize Options According to Original Image Size Original Image Size Available Rash Settings M $1 52 53 I. O O O O M O O O 51 O O 52 O 53 About Image Sizes Images such as the [8.0M 3458x2304] image size displayed in step 3 (p.233) have a 3:2 aspect ratio. The image size according to aspect ratios is shown in the table below. The asterisked image-recording quality figures do not exactly match the aspect ratio. The image will be slightly cropped. Quality Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.) 3:2 4:3 16:9 1:1 M 3456x2304 (8.0 megapixels) 3072x2304 (7.0 megapocels) 3456x1944 (6.7 megapixels) 2304x2304 (5.3 megapixels) SI 2592x1728 (4.5 megapixels) 2304x1728 (4.0 megapixels) 2592x1456' (3.8 megapixels) 1728x1728 (3.0 megapixels) 52 1920x1280 (2.5 megapixels) 1896)(1280' (2.2 megapixels) 1920x1080 (2.1 megapixels) 1280x1280 (1.6 megapixels) 53 720x480 (360.000 pixels) 640x480 (310.000 pixels) 720x400' (290.000 pixels) 480x480 (230.000 pixels) 234 EFTA01126431 Printing Images • Printing (p.236) You can connect the camera directly to a printer and print out the images in the card. The camera is compatible with PictBridge" which is the standard for direct printing. • Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) (p.245) DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print images recorded in the card according to your printing instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print. etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or give the print order to a photofinisher. EFTA01126432 Preparing to Print The direct printing procedure Is done entirely with the camera while you look at the LCD monitor. Connecting the Camera to a Printer fl ‘IZC. It' Set the camera's power switch to <OFF>. 2 Set up the printer. • For details. see the printer's instruction manual. 3 Connecting the camera to the printer. • Use the interface cable provided with the camera. • Connect the cable to the camera's <DIGITAL> terminal with the cable plug's <•e> icon facing the front of the camera. • To connect to the printer, refer to the printer's Instruction manual. A Turn on the printer. Set the camera's power switch to <ON>. • Some printers may make a beeping sound. 236 EFTA01126433 Preparing to Print 4 PictBridge Pei, (Ara sr son romt• ZQ 01/ wra 0, rm 000er'ess 6 Playback the image. • Press the <CI> button. • The image will appear, and the <Ii( > icon will appear on the upper left to indicate that the camera is connected to a pdnter. 4.0 • Movies cannot be printed. • The camera cannot be used with printers compatible only nth CP Direct or Bubble Jet Direct • Do not use any interface cable other than the one provided. • If there is a long beeping sound in step 5. it indicates a problem with the printer. Resolve the problem displayed by the error message (p244). • You can also print RAW images taken with this camera. • If you use a battery pack to power the camera, make stre it is fully charged. With a fully-charged battery. printing up to about 4 hours is possible. • Before disconnecting the cable. fret tum off the camera and printer. Hold the plug (not the cord) to pull out the cable. • Fcc direct printrig. using AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8 (sold separately) to power the camera is recommended. 237 EFTA01126434 M( Printing The screen display and setting options will differ depending on the printer. Some settings might not be available. For details. see the printer% instruction manual. Printer-connected icon P-"airmir - MO. Co p, otcfc t ifftelem 2 Print setting screen 1 Select the image to be printed. • Check that the <ey > icon is displayed on the upper left of the LCD monitor. • Press the <O.> key to select the image to be printed. Press <e>. ► The print setting screen will appear. Sets the printing effects (p.240). Sets the date or file number enpinteig to on or off. Sets the quantity to be printed. Sets the trimming (cropping) (p.243). Sets the paper size. type. and layout Returns to the screen in step 1. Starts the prinbng. The paper size. type, and layout you have set are displayed. • Depending on the printer, certain settings such as the date and file number imprinting and trimming might not be selectable. 3 Select [Paper settings). • Select [Paper settings]. then press <e›. ► The paper settings screen will appear. 238 EFTA01126435 /(Printing ID Setting the Paper Size Select the size of the paper loaded in the printer, then press ce>. IP. The paper type screen will appear. fp Setting the Paper Type Select the type of the paper loaded in the printer, then press cep>. -- The page layout screen will appear. W.: Setting the Page Layout 4) if' IIP pm wait tedsrect Ilerekrielle dean • Select the page layout then press CS>. IP. The print setting screen will reappear. Bordered The pnnt will have white borders along the edges. Borderless The print will have no borders. If your printer cannot print bordertess prints, the print wM have borders. Borderede The shooting information' will be imprinted on the border on 9x I 3crn and larger prints. xx-up Option to print 2.0. 8.9. 16. or 20 images on one sheet. 20-up,' 35up0 Twentyor 35 images wIl be printed as thwnbnals on At or Letter size paper7. • (20-upffill will have the shooting informations' imprinted. Default The page layout will vary depending on the printer model or its settings. '1:From the Eeldela. the Camera name. lens name. sneconginede. Shutter speed.aperwre. exposure CanpensatiOn ;Solemn. ISO speed. white Weave. etc.. NIII be annealed. '2:After ordering the prints with 'Digital Prot Order Fe•mat (DPOFT (p.205). you should pent by keowIng 'Direct Printing with DPOP (p.248). If the Swage's aspect ratio is different from the printing paper's aspect ratio. the image may be cropped significantly if you print it as a bordedess pnnt. If the image is cropped, it may look more grainy on the paper due to the fe rer mother of pixels. 239 EFTA01126436 /(Printing 4 Set the printing effects. • Set as necessary. If you need not set any printing effects. go to step 5. • What is displayed on the screen differs depending on the printer. • Select the option on the upper right (circled in the screenshot), then press <e>. • Select the desired printing effect, then press c©>. • If the c )> icon is displayed brightly next to <M >, you can also adjust the printing effect (p.242). Prindng Effect Description 50n The image cod be welted according to the printer's standard colors. The image's Exif data is used to make automatic corrections. 50ff No automatic correction will be applied. ®VIVID The image will be piled with higher saturation to produce more vivid blues and greens. ®NR Image noise is reduced before printing. B/W BM Prnts ki black-and-while with true blacks. B/W Coot tone Prkits n black-and-while with cool, bluish blacks. BIW Warm tone Prnts n black-and-while with warm, yellowish blacks. 0 Natural Pints the image in the actual colors and contrast. No automatic color adjustments are applied. CI Natural IA The printing characteristics are the same as the 'Natural' setting. However. this setting enables finer printing adjustments than with 'Natural.' 5befautt The printing will differ depending on the printer. For details. see the pnnter's instruction manual. ' When you change the printing effects. it is reflected In the Image displayed on the upper let Note that the printed image might look slightly different from the displayed image which is only an approximation. This also applies to [Brightness) and (Adjust levels) on page 242. 240 EFTA01126437 4( Printing Zo 4 PC C:;):In . 1 <mr. ' Mooing 590 kr Pict, steboil Pnoio Caron F, °orderless Print W c•cn nrring Paper IKONS Canal Pint 5 Set the date and file number imprinting. • Set as necessary. • Select <P.», then press <0>. • Set as desired, then press <C)>. 6 Set the number of copies. • Set as necessary. • Select <Q», then press <Oa. • Set the number of copies, then press <cp.. 7 Start printing. • Select [Print), then press <e>. 1:41 • With Easy printing, you can print another image using the same settings. Just select the image and press the <a> button. With Easy printing, the number of copies will always be 1. (You cannot set the number of copies.) Also. any trimming (p.243) will not be applied. • The (Default) sating for printing effects and other options are the printer's own default settings as set by the printer's manufacturer. See the printer's instruction manual to find out %fiat the (Default) settings are • Depending on the image's file size and image-recading quality, it may take some time for the printing to start after you select [Print). • If image tilt correction (p.243) has been applied, it may take longer to print the image. • To stop the printing, press <C)> while (Stop) is displayed, then select (01q. • If you execute (Clear all camera settings) (p.176), all the settings will revert to the default. 241 EFTA01126438 et Printing E Adjustment of Printing Effects R.-dried 011itural M 3Otress Admt kids Off &pinion Off hed-eve 0:fr On In step 4 on page 240. select the printing effect. When the <9> icon Is displayed brightly next to <Ca>. you can press the <INFO.> button to adjust the printing effect. What can be adjusted or what is displayed will depend on the selection made in step 4. • Brightness The image brightness can be adjusted. • Adjust levels When you select [Manual]. you can change the histogram's distribution and adjust the image's brightness and contrast. With the Adjust levels screen displayed. press the <INFO.> button to change the position of the <I>. Press the < 40, > key to freely adjust the shadow level (0-127) or highlight level (128-255). • *Brightener Effective in backlit conditions which can make the subject's face look dark. When (On] is set. the face will be brightened for printing. • Red-eye GMT. Effective in lash images where the subject has red eye. When (On] is set. the red eye will be corrected for printing. 47 S' 3 • The fa; Brightener] and (Red-eye corr.) effects will not show on the screen. • When you select (Detail set.). you can adjust the (Contrast]. (Saturation). (Color tone). and [Color balance). To adjust the (Color balance). use the <.>, keys. B is for blue. A is amber. M is magenta. and G is green. The color in the respective direction will be corrected. • If you select (Clear all). al the printing effect settings WI be reverted to the default. 242 EFTA01126439 4( Printing Trimming the image Tilt correction You can crop the image and print only the trimmed portion as if the Image was recomposed. Do the trimming right before printing. II you set the trimming and then set the print settings, you may have to set the trimming again. 1 On the print setting screen, select [Trimming'. 2 Set the trimming frame size, position, and aspect ratio. • The image area within the trimming frame will be printed. The trimming frame's aspect ratio can be changed with [Paper settings). Changing the trimming frame size When you press the <cl > or <C3I-0,> button. the size of the trimming frame will change. The smaller the trimming frame, the larger the image magnification will be for printing. Moving the trimming frame Press the <4>> key to move the frame over the image vertically or horizontally Move the trimming frame unti it covers the desired mage area. Rotating the frame Pressing the <INF0.> button will toggle the trimming frame between the vertical and horizontal orientations. This enables you to create a vertical-oriented print from a horizontal image. Image tilt correction By turning the <s> dial. you can adjust the image tilt angle up to ±10 degrees in 0.5-degree increments. When you adjust the image till, the ca› icon on the screen will turn blue. 3 Press ce> to exit the trimming. ► The print setting screen will reappear. • You can check the trimmed image area on the upper left of the print setting screen. 243 EFTA01126440 el Printing • Depending on the printer, the trimmed image area might not be printed as you specified. • The smaller you make the trimmre frame, the grainer the picture will look in the print. • While trimming the image, look at the camera's LCD monitor. If you look at the image on a TV screen, the trimming frame might not be displayed accurately. "F71 in Handling Printer Errors If you resolve a printer error (no ink. no paper. etc.) and select (Continue) to resume printing but it does not resume. operate the buttons on the printer to resume printing. For details on resuming the printing. see the printer's instruction manual. Error Messages If a problem occurs during printing. an error message vii appear on the camera's LCD monitor. Press <O, to stop printing. After fixing the problem. resume printing. For details on how to fix a printing problem. refer to the printer's instruction manual. Paper Error Check whether the paper is property loaded in the printer. Ink Error Check the printer's ink level. and check the waste ink tank. Hardware Error Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems. File Error The selected image cannot be printed via PictBAdge. Images taken with a different camera or images edited with a computer might not be printable. 244 EFTA01126441 " Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) You can set the print type, date imprinting, and file No. imprinting. The print settings will be applied to all print-ordered images. (They cannot be set individually for each image.) Setting the Printing Options sure tone ans ma s isni w Cress firers Select [Print order]. • Under the (al tab, select (Print order). then press Ce>. 1.$171, 2 Select [Set up]. AIWA was JStandarti 0 pnots • Select (Set up). then press <e>. Clint Ott Fie Si Off SS Inapt By. Am nap Sew, 3 Set the option as desired. • Set the (Print type]. Patel, and [File No.]. • Select the option to be set, then press (Punt type] <5>. Select the desired setting. then press <5,.. [Oa* [File No.] 245 EFTA01126442 es Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) Print type Q Standard Prints one image on one sheet. e Index Multiple thumbnail images are printed on we sheet. a i Both Prints both the standard and index prints. Date On [On) empreds the recorded date on the print. Off Fie number On [On) inprints the file No. on the print. Off 4 Exit the setting. • Press the <MENU> button. ► The print order screen will reappear. • Next, select fSel.lmage). [Bye). or All Image) to order the images to be printed. • Even if (Date) and [File No.) are set to (On). the date or file No. might not be imprinted depending on the print type setting and printer model. • When pnnting with DPOF. you must use the card whose prat order specifications have been set It will not work if you rust extract images from the card and by to print them. • Certain DPOF-compabble pellets and photofinishers might not be able to print the images as you specified. If this happens with your printer. refer to the printer's instruction manual. Or check with your photofinisher about compatibility when ordering prints. • Do not insert into the camera a card whose print order was set by a different camera and then try to specify a print order. The print order may not work or may be overwritten. Also. depending on the image type. the print order may not be possible. • RAW images and movies cannot be print ordered. You can print RAW magas through direct printing (p.236). • With (Index) prints, both the [Date) and Wile No.) cannot be set to (On) at the same time. 246 EFTA01126443 to Digital Print Order Format tDPOF) Print Ordering • Sol.lmage ,NPrn: oraer Stirdird ) rent • Mon 2 laws War On /It Mn off 1..e, him An rnir Set Lci CE9 is 2 : 07 a Quantity Select and order images one by one. To display the three-image display, press the <WI.> button. To return to the single-image display. press the <a> button. After completing the print order, press the <MENU> button to save the print order to the card. [Standard] [Both] Press the <0> key to set the number of copies to be printed for the displayed Total images selected image. [Index] Press the <0> key to checkmark the box <J> and the Image will be included in the index print. Check mark Index cal • Byllg Select (Mark all In folder] and select the folder. A print order for one copy of all the images in the folder will be placed. If you select [Clear all In folder] and select the folder, the print order for that folder will all be canceled. • All Image If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images in the card will be set for printing. If you select [Clear all on card], the print order will be cleared for all the images in the card. • Note that RAW images and movies will not be included n the print order even if you set 13y." or 'All image.' • When using a PictBridge printer. print no more than 40O images for one print order. If you specify more than this. all the images might not be printed. 247 EFTA01126444 i Direct Printing with DPOF With a PictBridge printer, you can easily print images with DPOF. —15,tendard runes If ran / raw', 3.4" e so CoPi ',Lie 1 Prepare to print. • See page 236. Follow the 'Connecting the Camera to a Printer' procedure up to step 5. 2 Under the [al tab, select [Print order]. 3 Select [Print]. • (Print] will be displayed only if the camera is connected to a printer and printing is possible. 4 Set the [Paper settings] (p.238). • Set the printing effects (p.240) if necessary. 5 Select [OK]. 4. • Before printng. be sure to set the paper size. • Certain printers cannot imprint the file No. • If (Bordered) is set. certain printers might imprint the date on the border. • Depending on the printer, the date might look light if it is imprinted on a bright background or on the border. • Under (Adjust levels). [Manual] cannot be selected. • If you stopped the printing and want to resume printing the remainng Outgoes. select (Resume). Note that printing will not resume if you stop the printing and any of the folowng occurs: • Before resuming the printng. you changed the print order or deleted print-ordered images. • When you set the index, you changed the paper setting before resuming the printng. • When you paused the printing. the cares remaining capacity was low. • If a prcblem occurs during printing, see page 244. 248 EFTA01126445 Customizing the Camera You can customize various camera features to suit your picture-taking preferences with Custom Functions. Custom Functions can be set and used only in Creative Zone modes. EFTA01126446 MENU Setting Custom Functions * Ct....tern Funtoorn(C in) (conked informatnnn cell RCN% Firms. Vet 10.0 Custom Function No. C in I Extolunt E novice erne! ninnerns C in I Extolunt E novice 'erne! ninnerns 1 Select [Custom Functions (C.Fn)]. • Under the [VI tab. select (Custom Functions (C.FO. then press <e>. Select the Custom Function No. • Press the <0> key to select the Custom Function No.. then press ce>. 3 Change the setting as desired. • Press the <AY> key to select the setting (number), then press <C)>. • Repeat steps 2 and 3 If you want to set other Custom Functions. • At the bottom of the screen. the current Custom Function settings are indicated below the respective function numbers. 4 Exit the setting. • Press the <MENU> button. Ir. The screen for step 1 will reappear. Clearing All Custom Functions Under (9! Clear settings). select [Clear all Custom Func. (C.F 0] to clear all the Custom Function settings (p.176). 250 EFTA01126447 Qin Setting Custom Foxboro* Custom Functions C.Fn I: Exposure 1 I Exposure level increments 2 ISO expansion Flash sync. speed in Av mode 3 p.252 C.Fn II: Image 4 Long exposure noise reduction p.253 5 High ISO speed noise reduction p.254 6 Highlight tone priority C.Fn III: AutofocusiDrive 7 AF-assist bean fring 8 Mirror lockup p.255 LV shooting O O O O O O O gem italt) ' If you use an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with a LED light the LED light will tum on for AF-assist even in the Ya- and M. modes. C.Fn IV: Operation/Others 9 Shutter/AE locic button p.256 10 Assign SET button 11 LCD display vMen pow& ON p.257 O O (Except 3) jI The shaded Custom Functions do not take effect during Live View (LV) shooting. (Setengs are disabled.) 251 EFTA01126448 OM Custom Function Settings * Custom Functions are organized into lour groups based on the function type: C.Fn I: Exposure. C.Fn II: Image. C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive, C.Fn IV: Operation/Others. C.Fn I: Exposure C.Fn-1 Exposure level increments 0: 113-stop 1: 1/2-stop Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed. aperture, exposure compensation. AEB. flash exposure compensation. etc. Effective when you prefer to control the exposure in less line increments than 1/3-stop increments. V With setting 1. the exposure level vnll be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor as shown below. k'S 4.5""ty''" ta' 1.2. 1 .C ; 1 . 2:3 C.Fn-2 ISO expansion 0: Off 1: On For the ISO speed. 'If (equivalent to ISO 12800) will be selectable. Note that if [C.Fn-6: Highlight tone priority] has been set to (1: Enable]. 'Ff cannot be set. C.Fn-3 Flash sync. speed in Av (Aperture-priority AE) mode When you use flash in the aperture-priority AE mode (Av). you can set the flash sync speed. 0: Auto The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 11200 sec. to 30 sec. to suit the scene's brightness. With an external Speedlite. high- speed sync is also possible. 1: 11200-1160 sec. auto Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low-light conditions. It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake. Hcnvever, while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash, the background may come out dark. 252 EFTA01126449 Cara Custom Function Settings* 2: 11200 sec. (fixed) The flash-sync speed is fixed to 1f200 sec. This more effectively prevents subject blur and camera shake than with setting 1. However. the background may come out darker than with setting 1. 0 When 1 or 2 S set. high-speed sync cannot be used with an external Speedlite. C.Fn II: Image C.Fn-4 Long exposure noise reduction 0: Off 1: Auto For 1 sec. or longer exposures. noise reduction is performed automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This [Auto] setting is effective in most cases. 2: On Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer. The [On] setting may be effective for noise that cannot be detected or reduced with the [Auto) setting. • With settings 1 and 2. after the picture is taken. the noise reduction process may take the same amount of time as the exposure. You cannot take another picture until the noise reduction process is completed. • At ISO 1600 and higher. noise might be more pronounced with setting 2 than with setting 0 or 1. • With setting 1 or 2. if a long exposure is shot with the Live View image displayed. 'BUSY' we be displayed during the noise reduction process. The Live View display will not appear and the noise reduction es completed. (You cannot take another picture.) 253 EFTA01126450 EED Custom Function &Amp • C.Fn-5 High ISO speed noise reduction Reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise reduction is applied at all ISO speeds. it is particularly effective at high ISO speeds. At low ISO speeds. the noise in the shadow areas is further reduced. Change the setting to suit the noise level. 0: Standard 1: Low 2: Strong 3: Disable • With setting 2. the maximum burst for continuous shooting will greatly decrease. • If you playback a OE or (20 +IL image with the camera or print an image directly. the effect of the high ISO speed noise reduction may look minimal. You can check the noise reduction effect or print noise-reduced images with Digital Photo Professional (provided software. p.302). C.Fn-6 Highlight tone priority 0: Disable 1: Enable Improves the highlight detail. The dynamic range is expanded from the standard 18% gray to bright highlights. The gradation between the grays and highlights becomes smoother. • With setting I. the Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.109) is automabcaly set to (Disable] and the setting cannot be charged. • With setting I. noise may become slightly more pronounced than with setbrg 0. .10 With setting I. the sellable range car be ISO 200 - 6400. Also. the <D4-, icon Will be displayed on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder when highlight tone priority is enabled. 254 EFTA01126451 arin Custom Function SetMISS • C.Fn III: Autofocus/Drive C.Fn-7 AF-assist boam firing The AF-assist beam can be emitted by the camera's buit-in flash or by an external. EOS-dedicated Speedlite. 0: Enable If necessary, the AF-assist beam will be emitted by the built-in flash or external Speedlite. 1: Disable The AF-assist beam is not emitted. 2: Enable external flash only If an external Speedlite is attached, it will emit the AF-assist beam when necessary. The camera's built-in flash will not fire the AF-assist beam. 3: IR AF assist beam only Among external Speedtiles. only those which have an infrared AF-assist beam will be able to emit the beam. This prevents any Speedlite which uses a series of small flashes (like the built-in flash) from firirig the AF- assist beam. With an EX-series Speedlite equipped with a LED light, the LED light will not automatically turn on for AF-assist. If the external Speedlite's (AF-assist beam firing} Custom Function is set to (Disabled]. the Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam even if the camera's C.Fn-7 m set to 0. 2. or 3. C.Fn-8 Mirror lockup 0: Disable 1: Enable Prevents mechanical vibrations in the camera caused by the reflex mirror action which can disturb shooting with super telephoto lenses or close-up (macro) shooting. See page 122 for the mirror lockup procedure. 255 EFTA01126452 GEO Custom Function Settings° C.Fn IV: Operation/Others C.Fn-9 ShutterfAE lock button 0: AF/AE lock 1: AE lock/AF Convenient when you want to focus and meter separately. Press the <*> button to autofocus. and press the shutter button halfway to apply AE lock. 2: AF/AF lock, no AE lock In the AI Servo AF mode, you can press the <*> button to stop the AF operation momentarily. This prevents the AF from being thrown off by any obstacle passing between the camera and subject. The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken. 3: AE/AF. no AE lock This is useful for subjects which keep moving and stopping repeatedly. In the Al Servo AF mode, you can press the <*> button to start or stop the AI Servo AF operation. The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken. Thus, the optimum focusing and exposure wil always be achieved as you wait for the decisive moment. C.Fn-10 Assign SET button You can assign a frequently-used function to <e>. Press <0). when the camera is ready to shoot. 0: Normal (disabled) 1: Image quality Press <e> to display the image-recording quality setting screen on the LCD monitor. Select the desired inage-recording quality. then press <63>. 2: Flash exposure compensation When you press < (0>. the flash exposure compensation setting screen will appear. Set the flash exposure compensation. then press <e›. 3: LCD monitor On/Off Assigns the same function as the <DISP.> button. 4: Menu display Press <C.,??,> to display the menu screen. 5: ISO speed The ISO speed setting screen will appear. Press the <4k> key or turn the <C4> dial to change the ISO speed. You can also refer to the viewfinder to set the ISO speed. 256 EFTA01126453 ® Custom Function Settings C.Fn-11 LCD display whon powor ON 0: Display on When the power switch is turned on. the shooting settings will be displayed (p.47). 1: Previous display status If you pressed the <DISP.> button and turned off the camera while the LCD monitor was off. the shooting settings will not be displayed when you turn on the camera again. This helps to save battery power. The menu screens and image playback will still be displayed when used. If you pressed the <DISP.> button to display the shooting settings and then turn off the camera. the shooting settings will be displayed when you turn Co the camera again. 257 EFTA01126454 MENU Registering My Menu* Under the My Menu tab, you can register up to six menu options and Custom Functions whose settings you change frequently. Mr Wriu srmnps YY Ihmu strict% Nrisr.ter to Mt str.., Sort Wee RenUtears Dein. Yi amn Sad nen lb flirter CV."). Mp Meat itsAler ntan card trope renew Nriphitral aaflfl COMM iled-eye Wu( 1 Select (My Menu settings). • Under the (*I tab. select [My Menu settings]. then press <R, . 2 Select [Register to My Menu]. • Select [Register to My Menu]. then press <6;)›. About My Menu settings Register the desired items. • Select the dem to bo registered, then press Ce›. • On the confirmation dialog. select (OK] and press <O> to register the item. • You can register up to six items. • To return to the screen in step 2. press the <MENU> button. • Sort You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select [Sort] and select the item whose order you want to change. Then press <a>. With [$1 displayed. press the <AY> key to change the order, then press <O>. • Delete Item/Items and Delete all Items You can delete any of the registered items. (Delete Item/Items] deletes one item at a time, and (Delete all Items] deletes all items. • Display from My Menu When [Enable] is set. the (*I tab will be displayed first when you display the menu screen. 258 EFTA01126455 I Reference This chapter provides reference information for camera features, system accessories. etc. EFTA01126456 Using a Household Power Outlet With AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8 (sold separately), you can connect the camera to a household power outlet and not worry about the remaining battery level. Connect the power cord. • Connect the power cord as shown in the illustration. • After using the camera. unplug the power plug from the power outlet. 2 Connect the DC Coupler. • Connect the cord's plug to the DC Coupler. 3 Insert the DC Coupler. • Open the cover and insert the DC Coupler until it locks in place. 4 Push in the DC cord. • Open the DC cord hole cover and install the cord as shown. • Close the cover. Do not connect or disconnect the power cord while the camera's power switch is set to <0N>. 260 EFTA01126457 Remote Control Shooting Remote Controller RC -6 (Sold separately) This remote controller enables you to take pictures wirelessly up to about 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera. You can either shoot immediately or use a 2-sec. delay. Remote control sensor • Set the self-timer to c7 V> (P.69). • Point the remote controller toward the camera's remote control sensor and press the transmit button. ► The camera will autofocus. IPP. When focus is achieved, the self-timer lamp will light and the picture will be taken. 4-0 Camera miscperation may occur near certain types of fluorescent lights. Owing wireless remote control shooting. try to keep die camera away from fluorescent tight sources. N. • Remote Controller RC-1/RC-5 (sold separately) can also be used. • The Remote Controller can also be used for shootiv movies (p.159). Remote Controller RC-5 cannot be used to take still photos in the movie shooting mode. 261 EFTA01126458 Remote ConVol Shooting ji Remote Switch RS-60E3 (Sold separately) Remote Switch RS-60E3 (sold separately) comes with an approx. 60 cm/2.0 ft cord. When connected to the camera remote control terminal. Remote Switch RS-60E3 can be used to press the shutter button halfway and completely. Using the Eyepiece Cover When you use the self-timer, bulb, or Remote Switch and do not look through the viewfinder, stray light entering the viewfinder can cause the image to look dark. To prevent this, use the eyepiece cover (p.25) attached to the camera strap. During Live View shooting and movie shooting, attaching the eyepiece cover Is unnecessary. I Remove the eyecup. • Push the bottom of the eyecup to remove. 2 Attach the eyepiece cover. • Slide the eyepiece cover down into the eyepiece groove to attach it. • After taking the picture. detach the eyepiece cover and attach the eyecup by sliding it down the eyepiece groove. 262 EFTA01126459 External Speedlites EOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites Basically operates like a built-In flash for easy operation. When an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) is attached to the camera, almost all the autoflash control is done by the camera. In other words, it is like a high-output flash attached externally in place of the built-in flash. For detailed Instructions, see the EX-serles SpeedIlte's Instruction manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all the features of EX-series Speedlites. Shoe-mount Speedites Macro Liles • With an EX-series Speedlite not compabble with flash function settings (p.181). only (% exp. comp) and (E-TTL II meter.) can be set for (External flash func. setting). (Certain EX-series Speedlites also enable (Shutter sync.) to be set.) • If flash exposure compensation is set with the external Speedlite. the flash exposure compensation icon displayed on the camera's LCD monitor will change from to IN. • If the Speedlite's Custom Function has the flash metering mode set to TTL autoflash. the flash will fre at ful output only. 263 EFTA01126460 External Speedhies Canon Speedlites other than the EX-series • With an EZ/E/EGML/TL-series Speedlite set In TTL or A-TTL autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only. Set the camera's shooting mode to <M> (manual exposure) or <An (aperture-priority AE) and adjust the aperture setting before shooting. • If you are using a Speedlite which has manual flash mode. shoot in the manual flash mode. Using Non-Canon Flash Units Sync Speed The camera can synchronize with compact. non-Canon flash units at 1/200 sec. or slower shutter speeds. Use a sync speed slower than 1/200 sec. Be sure to test the flash unit beforehand to make sure it synchronizes properly with the camera. Cautions for Live View shooting A non-Canon flash will not fire during Live View shooting. • If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to another camera brand. the camera may not operate properly and malfunction may result. • Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit on the camera's hot shoe. It might not fro. 264 EFTA01126461 Using Eye-Fi Cards With a commercially-available Eye-Fi card already set up, you can automatically transfer captured images to a personal computer or upload them to an online service via a wireless LAN. The image transfer is a function of the Eye-Fi card. For instructions on how to set up and use the Eye-FI card or to troubleshoot any image transfer problems, refer to the Eye-Fi card's instruction manual or inquire the card's manufacturer. 4) The camera is not guaranteed to support Eye-Ft card functions (Including wireless transfer). In case of an issue with an Eye-Ft card, please check with the card manufacturer. Also note that approval is required to use Eye-Fl cards in many countries or regions. Without approval, use of the card is not permitted. If it is unclear whether the card has been approved for use in your area, please check with the card manufacturer. Mm power an n-. hum MS OnCIN Fait Re rastedrq Cadman at Misr Sabin oft n 1 -2 3 4 Insert an Eye-Fi card. (p.29) Select [Eye-Fi settings]. • Under the [S.] tab, select (Eye-Fl settings), then press < • This menu is displayed only when an Eye-Fi card has been inserted into the camera. Enable the Eye-Fi transmission. • Press <s>. set (Eye-Ft trans.] to [Enable), then press Cri:y>. • If you set (Disable], automatic transmission will not occur even with the Eye-Fl card inserted (Transmission status icon S). Display the connection information. • Soled (Connection info.). then press Ce>. 265 EFTA01126462 Uting Eye-FiCaids Connatonlao. Amapa NM: 6110661731567180 Cenntrtlen: ttlennecdrer. (ye-nectSits: 01-12-56.07-09c Munn Ver.: COM Oct 6 214 11.44:62 Mit ONE SHOT C [Si El 5 6 Transmission status icon (Gray) Not connected re (Blinking) Connecting re (Displayed) Connected • ( 1 ) Transferring Check the [Access point SSID:]. • Check that an access point is displayed for (Access point SSID:). • You can also check the Eye-Fi card's MAC address and firmware version. • Press the <MENU> button three times to exit the menu. Take the picture. • The picture is transferred and the icon switches from gray (Not connected) to one of the icons below. • For transferred images. is displayed in the shooting information display (p.226). : No connection with access point. : Connecting with access point. : Connection to access point established. : Image transfer to access point in progress. EFTA01126463 Using Eye-Fi Cards 0 Cautions for Using Eye-Fl Cards • If •4)" is displayed. an error occurred while retneving the card information. Turn the camera's power switch off and on again. • Even if (Eye-Fl trans.) is set to (Disable). it may still transmit a signal. In hospitals. airports. and otter places where wireless transmissions are prohibited, remove the Eye-F' card from the camera. • If the image transfer does not function. check the Eye-Fi card and personal computer settings. For details. see the card's instruction manual. • Depending on the wireless LAN's connection conditions. the image transfer may take longer or it might be interrupted. • Because of the transmission function. the Eye-Fi cad may become hot. • The battery power will be consumed faster. • During the image transfer. auto power off wil not take effect 267 EFTA01126464 Function Availability Table According to Shooting Modes . •: Set automatically 0: User selectable I ' Not se'ectable MiXICi Dial Basic Zona Creativ Zone 19! e.mo• •, QC QQOCOOOCOO 1O AA r•Aenang **wogs aflatiMiraa ISO speed PlcIur• Style *ally Auto I ISO AM -manual • • OOOOOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0'2 belliatie IT.WITIII 15014.14 Dal 0 0 0 0 0 Au•olalic PAWS E2a ESS I392 Ea EMI Ea ga gai Manual seledias 0 0 0 0 0 0 Shoo by Shoot W igtorn whit , l'alamtCuBlem ambience telethon 0 0 0 0 0 0 www•tAls Auto I Prune! 0000 • • • • • • • •000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 I St ing" 0 0 0 0 0 Auto UgMIng Opdmiax • • • • • • • • 0 0 0 0 0 0 LeasrsdPinslibmnsue 000000000000 tartan o o um.seam apeman noise nau 0 0 0 0 0 NOW sped noise Menke • • • • • • • • 0 0 0 0 0 Highlight tons priority 0 0 0 0 0 0 Color snas• ORGS • • • • • • • •0000 0 Adobe Fide 0 0 0 0 0 Foossiss One-Sha AF • • • • 0 0 0 0 0 a Not: EN AI Servo AF • 0 0 0 0 0 AI Foals AF • • • 0 0 0 0 0 AS saint swiss • • • • • • • • 0 0 0 0 0 lal AFassist beam • • • • -1 • 0 0 0 0 0 Manual (OF) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 : The 0 icon indicates MI photo shooting in the movie shoot:1g mode. • : For manual exposures only. : If used during movie shoobng. it will switch to <NE>. • : If the AF mode is <N®> during Live View shooing. the external Speedlite will emit the ST-assist beam when necessary 268 EFTA01126465 Funobon Avanabitty Table According to Shooting Modes Node DIM BastaZona Creative Zona ege CC CD elk& 4P, 6 P Tv Av M Me If Ite mon mode Esaluative • • ••••• •OOO O O Wino nod. ' een O O O O O Fawn Program shift O cExpxon eselon co O O O O 0 4 AE8 O O O O O AE lock O O O O O" Depend-1W Pitt O O O O O 01W Sing'. shooing O I O O OO O O O O O O I. Cceinicus Otago; OO O O O O O O tg (to sec.) O O O O O O O O O O O O O .512 R sec .> O O O O O tk (C0MM.)* O O O O O O O O O O O O O Out 4ri En flrfOA0Markey • O • • • Flash on O O O O O O Flash of • O • • O O O O O • EedstrumbFIFF O O O O O O O O O O FE lock O O O O O Finn **inure GOOVOMICe O O O O O VilrelOSS 00,4(01 O O O O O Extn flash Funclisn MANN O O O O O Osman Se ILIMIIM te O O O O O LM View shooting O O O O O O O O O O O O O Aspect ado" O O O O O Quick Control O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Foatura guide O O O O O O O O O O O O O O 5 : Settable only for Live View shooting. 6 : Satiable only for auto exposures. 269 EFTA01126466 MENU Menu Settings For Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting CI Shooting 1 (Red) Quality dt.tilltilMiiIMHIS1/ilS1(52(53( SIM+ALiaM 76 Beep Enable! Disable 166 Release shutter without card Enable! Disable 166 Image review Off/ 2 sec./ 4 sec./ 8 sec. /Hold 166 Peripheral illumination correction Enable / Disable 110 Red-eye reduction Disable / Enable 91 Flash control Flash firing / E-TTL II metering mode! Built-in flash function setting / External flash function setting! External flash C.Fn setting I Clear external flash C.Fn setting 180 fit Shooting 2 (Red) Exposure compensation/AEB 1/3-stop or 112-stop increments. t5 stops (AEB: ±.2 slops) 105 Auto Lighting Optimizer Disable / Low / Standard / Strong 109 Cs) Evaluative metering / CO Partial metering / Metering mode C0 Spot metereig / 0 Center-weighted average metering 102 Custom White Balance Manual setting of white balance 117 WB Shift/SKI WB correction: White balance correction 119 BKT setting: White balance bracketing 120 Color space sRGB / Adobe RGB 121 C38Auto / ESStandard / Ea Portrait / 81 Picture Style CRII-andsace / Neutral! ERI MFaithful / 112 CA Monochrome / 'SD User Def. 1. 2. 3 115 Page • The [On Shooting 2. (CM) Shooting 3. (V) Set-up 3. and (*) My Menu screens (tabs) are not displayed in Basic Zone modes. • The (Co) Shooting 4 tab is displayed in Basic Zone modes as the (n9 Shooting 2 tab. • Shaded menu options are not displayed in Basic Zone modes. 270 EFTA01126467 EI Menu Seitogs Cai Shooting 3 (Red) Dust Delete Data Obtains data to be used to erase dust spots 185 ISO Auto Max.: 400! Max.: 800! Max.: 1600/ Max.: 3200! Max.: 6400 80 Cal Shooting 4 (Red) Live View shooting Enable! Disable 125 AF mode Live mode / I Live mode / Cluidc mode 131 Grid display Off !Grid 14* !Grid 2 OM 129 Aspect ratio • 3:2 / 4:3 116:9/ 1:1 129 Metering timer 130 4 sec./ 16 sec./30 sac./ 1 min.! 10 min. I 30 min. D. Playback 1 (Blue) Protect images Select images! An mimes in folder / Unprotect all images in folder/ MI images on card! Unprotect all rages on card 222 Rotate Rotate vertical images 205 Erase images Select and erase images 1 MI images in folder! All images on card 224 Print order Specify images to be pried (DPOF) 245 Creative filters Grainy BM / Soft focus/Fish-eye effect / Toy camera effect / Mniature effect 230 Realm Dovmsize the images pixel count 233 E1 Playback 2 (Blue) Histogram Brightness! RGB 228 Image jump w!j1 1 image! 10 images! 100 images! Date! Folder/ Movies/Stills I Rating 203 Slide show Playback description! Display time! Repeat! Transition effect! Background music 215 Rating (OFF) / (-) / ki / r...) II:11 IN] 206 Bass boost Disable! Enable 213 Control over HDMI Disable / Enable 219 271 EFTA01126468 9E10 Menu Settings Set-up 1 (Yellow) Page Auto power off 30 sec./ 1 min./ 2 min. / 4 min./ 8 min. / 15 min. / Oft 167 Auto rotate OnCIE /On. /Off 174 Format Initialize and erase data on the card 45 File numbering Continuous! Auto reset / Manual reset 170 Select folder Create and select a folder 168 Screen color Select the shooting settings screen color 179 Eye-Fl settings' Eye-Fi transmission: Disable / Enable Connection information 265 ' Displayed only when an Eye-Fi card is used. te Set-up 2 (Yellow) LCD brightness Seven brightness levels provided 167 LCD off/on button Shutter button / Shutter/DISP / Remains on 179 DateMme Set the date (year. month. day) and time (hour. Olin.. sec.) 34 Languages Select the Mtedace language 35 Video system NTSC / PAL 221 Sensor cleaning Auto cleankm: Enable / Disable 184 Clean now aeon marssally 187 Feature guide Enable / Disable 48 Set-up 3 (Yellow) Custom Functions (C.Fn) Custombre camera functions as desired 250 Copyright Information Display copyright information / Enter author's name / Enter copyright details I Delete copyright information 172 Clear settings Clear all camera settings / Clear all Custom Franc. (C.Fn) 176 Firmware Ver. For updating the frrnware - * My Menu (Green) My Menu settings Register frequently-used menu items and Custom Functions 272 EFTA01126469 IMO Menu Settings 11 For Movie Shooting CD* Movie 1 (Red) Movie exposure Auto / Manual 157 AF mode Live mode / I Live mode I Quick mode 157 AF with shutter button during IR Disable / Enable 157 ISShutter/AE lock button AF/AE lock/ AE loddAF / AF/AF bock. no AE lock / AE/AF. no AE bock 158 Remote control Disable / Enable 159 ',Highlight tone priority Disable / Enable 159 Page Ceip' Movie 2 (Red) Movie recording size Movie recording size: 1920x1080(Th / lS / rip 1280x720 (rib / riot 640x480 (lie / IR) 150 Digital zoom: OFF / 3x - 10x 152 Sound recording Sound recording: Auto / Manual / Disable Recordeig level Wind filter: Disable / Enable 160 Metering timer 4 sec./ 16 sec. !30 30 sec./ 1 min./ 10 min./ 30 min. 161 Grid display Off! Grid 141= ! Grid 2 UM 161 Video snapshot Disable/ 2 sec. movie 14 sec. movie / 8 sec. movie 153 273 EFTA01126470 l Menu Settings aye Moyle 3 (Red) Exposure compensation 1P3-stop increments. 35 stops 162 Auto Lighting Optimizer Disable I Low! Standard / Strong 162 Custom White Balance Manual setteg of white balance 162 Picture Style ®Auto! lagStandard / GRIPatrait/ IMLandscape / liaNeutral / lalFaithful/ 162 MMonochrome / Lffil User Def. 1, 2,3 Li Shooting 1 (Red) Duality InfiL/AM/AM/i5PASUS2 / 53 / MI +AL I CB 76 Beep Enable! Disable 166 Release shutter without card Enable / Disable 166 Image review Off/ 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold 166 Peripheral Illumination correction Enable / Disable 110 E Playback 1 (Blue) Protect images Select images / All images in folder / Unprotect all images in folder / MI images on card I Unprotect all images on card 222 Rotate Rotate vertical images 205 Erase Images Select and erase images /AS images in fader/ All images on card 224 Print order Specify images to be wilted (DPOF) 245 Creative filters Grainy BM / Soft focus! Fish-eye effect! Toy camera effect / Miniature effect 230 Resize Downsize the images pixel count 233 POP 274 EFTA01126471 IMBI Menu Seitogs Playback 2 (Blue) Fees Histogram Brightness / RGB 228 Image jump w/e2.1 1 image 110 images /100 images !Date / Folder/ Movies/Stills/Rating 203 Slide show Playback description / Display time !Repeat/ Transition effect! Background music 215 Rating IOFFPN/Ei/f4/C:I/M 206 Bass boost Disable / Enable 213 Control over HDMI Disable / Enable 219 Set-up 1 (Yellow) Auto power off 30 sec.! 1 min. 12 min. /4 min./ 8 min. / 15 min./Off 167 Auto rotate OnCle / O&M /Off 174 Format Initialize and erase data on the card 45 File numbering Continuous / Auto reset / Manual reset 170 Select folder Create and select a folder 168 Eye-Fl settings' Eye-Ft transmission: Disable !Enable Connection information 265 ' Displayed only when an Eye-Ft card is used. So Set-up 2 (Yellow) LCD brightness Seven brightness levels provided 167 Data/Time Set the date (year. month. day) and tine (hour. min.. sec.) 34 Language Select the interface language 35 Video system NTSC / PAL 221 Feature guide Enable !Disable 48 al • The menu tabs and options displayed wM differ for viewfinder shooting. Live View shooting. and movie shooing. • The [Ow'l Movie 1. (Owl Movie 2. and pest) Movie 3 screens (tabs) are displayed only in the movie shooting mode. 275 EFTA01126472 System Map 9 ST-E2 270EX II 32CEX 430E/4 I %DEA II Mayo RN Lite Macro 'Rein Lae IIIR•14EX MT44EX 1 1 1 1 Eyepiece Extender EPEXISI Fixtta FRITZ Er E-SeneS 00;04 My:anent Lenses Angle Finder C Semi Hard Case 01194 Hand Strap E2 E - Battery Pack LP-ES LOEB ar LC.ESE Ell Banay Charger 0 - AC Adapter Adapter Kit ACK-E8 Compact Power Adapter Battery klagatIns BalOyM,gaZae C6PS700 Battery Grip BEME8Lfartm SiG1LE8A ler BO-Es IP-E8 balery WAS sereANLR6 batectes 276 EFTA01126473 System Map Remote Control Cr RC-6 Fternot Smtch RS4OE3 a • a EF lames External mioroptOne Ste.10 AV Cabse AVC•DC400ST 11.3 m14.3 ft) caa stIV EaD ICMI Cable HTC-100 (2.9 mI9.5 RI EOSDK4TAL Saban Insteame $(4.4104 Oak Wed cas zall Interlace Cable (1.3 m/4.3 ft.) Interfam Cable IFC-200Uf590U (1903201(4.7ml 4R.) 0 0 SIXSDIIC/SDXC Card reader memory card • TVMcleo PM1360pe-conse0019 OMB USB po0 Scowler VAndows Wledeva Meta Windows XP Mao OS X • Thelength of all cables *wax. **rnr'et 277 EFTA01126474 Troubleshooting Guide If a problem occurs with the camera. first refer to this Troubleshooting Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center. Power-Related Problems The battery pack does not recharge. ♦ Do not recharge any battery pack other than a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E8. The battery charger's lamp blinks. • If there is a problem with the battery charger. the protective circuit will stop the charging operation and the charge lamp will blink in orange. If this happens. disconnect the charger's power plug from the power outlet and remove the battery pack. Attack, the battery pack to the charger again and wait a whie before connecting the charger to a power outlet again. The camera does not operate even when the power switch is set to <ON>. • The battery is not properly installed in the camera (p.28). • Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed (p.28). • Make sure the card slot cover is closed (p.29). • Recharge the battery (p.26). • Press the <DISP.> button (p.47). The access lamp still blinks even when the power switch is set to <OFF >. ♦ If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card. the access lamp will still continue to lighUblink for a few seconds. When the image recording is completed. the power will turn off automatically. 278 EFTA01126475 Troutteshoebne Guide The battery becomes exhausted quickly. • Use a fully-charged battery pack (p.26). • The rechargeable battery pack performance will degrade over repeated use. Purchase a new one. • If you use Live View shooting or shoot movies for a prolonged period (p.123. 141). the number of possible shots will decrease. • If you hold down the shutter button for a long time or often use only the AF without taking pictures. the number of possible shots wil decrease. • If you often use the LCD monitor. the number of possible shots will decrease. • If you use the lens Image Stabilizer. the number of possible shots will decrease. The camera turns off by itself. • Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power o0 to take effect. set pi Auto power off] to [Oft] (p.167). • Even if (t . Auto power off) has been set to [On the LCD monitor will still turn off after the camera is idle for 30 min. Press the <DISP.> button to turn on the LCD monitor. Shooting-Related Problems No images can be shot nor recorded. • The card is not properly inserted (p.29). • If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to make room (p.29.224). • If you try to focus in the One-Shot AF mode while the focus confirmation light <•> in the viewfinder blinks, a picture cannot be taken. Press the shutter button halfway again to focus, or focus manually (p.40. 87). • Slide the card's write-protect switch to the Write/Erase selling (p.29). 279 EFTA01126476 Troubleshooting Guide The card cannot be used. • If a card error message is displayed. see page 30 or 287. The file numbering does not start from 0001. • If the card already contains recorded images. the image number might not start from 0001 (p.170). The image Is out of focus. • Set the lens focus mode switch to <AF> (p.36). • To prevent camera shake. press the shutter button gently (p.39. 40). • If the lens has an Image Stabilizer. set the IS switch to <ON>. • In low light. the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter speed (p.94). set a higher ISO speed (p.79). use flash (p.90). or use a tripod. Horizontal stripes appear, or the exposure or color tone look strange. • Horizontal stripes or irregular exposures can be caused by fluorescent light. LED bulbs, or other artificial lighting during viewfinder or Live View shooting. Also, the exposure or color tone might not come out right. A slow shutter speed may solve the problem. 280 EFTA01126477 Troubieshcoung Guide The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower. • Under [ti Custom Functions (C.Fn)]. set [5: High ISO speed noise reduction] to (Standard]. (Low]. or [Disable]. If it is set to [Strong]. the maximum burst during continuous shooting will greatly decrease (p.254). • If you shoot something that has fine detail (field of grass. etc.). the file size will be larger and the actual maximum burst might be lower than the number mentioned on page 76. ISO 100 cannot be set. ♦ Under (ti Custom Functions (C.Fn)]. if [6: Highlight tone priority] is set to (1: Enable]. ISO 100 cannot be set. 11[0: Disable] is set. ISO 100 can be set (p.254). This also applies to movie shooting (p.159). The Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set. ♦ Under (4: Custom Functions (C.Fn)]. if [6: Highlight tone priority] is set to (1: Enable]. the Auto Lighting Optimizer cannot be set. 11[0: Disable] is set. the Auto Lighting Optimizer can be set (p.254). This also applies to movie shooting (p.162). ISO speed [H] (ISO 12800) cannot be set. • Under (4: Custom Functions (C.Fn)]. if [6: Highlight tone priority] is set to [1: Enable]. the (H] ISO speed cannot be selected even when (2: ISO expansion] has been set to (1: On]. If (0: Disable] is set. [H) can be set (p.252). 281 EFTA01126478 Troubleshooting Guide When I use the <AV> mode with flash, the shutter speed becomes slow. • II you shoot at night when the background is dark, the shutter speed becomes slow automatically (slow-sync shooting) so that both the subject and background are properly exposed. If you do not want a slow shutter speed to be set. set [3: Flash sync. speed in Av mode) in (V Custom Functions (C.Fn)) to 1 or 2 (p.252). The built-in flash pops up by Itself. • In the j. 0. $. and modes, the built-in flash will pop-up automatically when flash is necessary. The built-in flash does not fire. • II you shoot continuously with the built-in flash at short intervals. the flash might slop operating to protect the flash unit. I cannot set flash exposure compensation with [External flash func. setting]. • II flash exposure compensation has been set on an external Speedlite. [Flash exp. comp] (p.182) cannot be set in the [External flash func. setting) screen. Also. if you set flash exposure compensation with the camera and then set flash exposure compensation with the external Speedlite. the Speedlite's flash exposure compensation setting will override the camera's. When the Speedlite's flash exposure compensation is canceled (set to 0). flash exposure compensation can be set with the camera. High-speed sync cannot be set in the <Ay> mode. • Under IV Custom Functions (C.Fn)). set [3: Flash sync. speed in Av mode) to [0: Auto) (p.252). The camera makes a noise when it is shaken. • The built-in flash's pop-up mechanism moves slightly. This is normal. 282 EFTA01126479 The shutter makes two shooting sounds during Live View Shooting. II you use flash. the shutter will make two sounds each time you shoot (p.125). During Live View and movie shooting, a white <rri > or rod <ill> icon is displayed. • It indicates that the camera's internal temperature is high. If the white <M> icon is displayed, the still photo's image quality might deteriorate. If the red <U> icon is displayed, it indicates that the Live View or movie shooting will soon be terminated automatically (p.139. 163). Movie shooting terminates by itself. • If the card's writing speed is slow. movie shooting may stop automatically. Use an SO Speed Class 6 -imAssia -or faster card. To rind out the card's readAwite speed. see the card manufacturer's Web site. etc. The movie shooting will be terminated automatically if the file size reaches 4 GB or if the movie length reaches 29 min. 59 sec. The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear during movie shooting. Flickering. horizontal stripes (noise). or irregular exposures can be caused by fluorescent light. LED bulbs. or other artificial lighting during movie shooting. Also. changes in the exposure (brightness) or color tone might also be recorded. With manual exposures. a slow shutter speed may solve the problem. 283 EFTA01126480 Troubleshecting Guide Playback Problems The LCD monitor does not display a clear Image. • If the LCD monitor is dirty. use a soft cloth to clean it. • In low or high temperatures. the LCD monitor display may seem slow or might look black. It will return to normal at room temperature. Part of the Image blinks in black. • It is the highlight alert (p.228). Overexposed highlight areas with a loss of highlight detail will blink. The image cannot be erased. • If the image has been protected. it cannot be erased (p.222). The movie cannot play. • Movies edited with a personal computer using the provided ZoomBrowser EX/Image8rowser (p.302) or other software cannot be played with the camera. However, video snapshot albums edited with ZoomBrowser EX/Image8rowser can be played on the camera. When the movie is played. camera operation noise can be heard. • If you operate the camera's dials or lens during movie shooting, the operation noise will also be recorded. Use an external microphone (commercially available) (p.160). The movie has still moments. • During autoexposure movie shooting. if there is a drastic change in the exposure level, the recording will slop momentarily until the brightness stabilizes. If this happens, use manual exposure (p.144). 284 EFTA01126481 TroubleshooUng Guge The subject looks distorted during movie shooting. • If you move the camera to the left or right quickly (high-speed panning) or shoot a moving subject. the image may look distorted. No Image appears on the TV screen. • Make sure the AV cable or HDMI cable's plug is inserted all the way in (p.218. 221). • Set the video OUT system (NTSC/PAL) to the same video system as the TV set (p.221). My card reader does not recognize the card. • Depending on the card reader and computer OS used. SDXC cards might not be correctly recognized. In such a case. connect your camera to the computer with the provided interface cable. then transfer the images to your computer using EOS Utility (provided software. p.302). Display Problems The menu screen shows few tabs and options. • In Basic Zone modes and in movie shooting mode, certain tabs and menu options are not displayed. Set the shooting mode to a Creative Zone mode (p.43). The file name's first character is an underscore ("_MG_"). • Set the color space to sRGB. If Adobe RGB is set. the first character will be an underscore (p.121). 285 EFTA01126482 Troubleshoots's° Guide The file name starts with "MVI". ♦ H is a movie He (p.171). The shooting date and time displayed is incorrect. ♦ The correct date and time has not been set (p.34). The date and time is not in the picture. • The shooting date and time does not appear in the picture. The date and time is instead recorded in the image data as shooting information. When printing, you can imprint the date and time in the picture by using the date and time recorded in the shooting information (p.241). [NM is displayed. ♦ If the card has recorded a number of images greater than the camera can display. [WM will be displayed (p.207). [Eye•Fi settings] does not appear. ♦ [Eye-Fi settings) will appear only when an Eye-Fi card is inserted into the camera. If the Eye-Fi card has a write-protect tab set to the LOCK position, you will not be able to check the cards connection status or disable Eye-Fi card transmission (p.265). Printing-Related Problems There are fewer printing effects than listed in the instruction manual. • What is displayed on the screen differs depending on the printer. This instruction manual ists all the printing effects available (p.240). 286 EFTA01126483 Error Codes E "Of No. • _I Wel Camnicedons bonen tre unero axl leas b 'no Dean cht Wert COMICS Countermeasures II there is a problem with the camera, an error message will appear. Follow the on- screen Instmetions. No. Error Message & Solution 01 Communications between the camera and lens Is faulty. Clean the lens contacts. 4 Clean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens and use a Canon lens (p.15. 18). 02 Card cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or format card with camera. 4 Remove and insert the card again. replace the card. or format the card (p.29. 45). 04 Cannot save Images because card Is full. Replace card. 4 Replace the card. erase unnecessary images. or format the card (p.29. 220. 45). 06 The built-In flash could not be raised. Turn the camera off and on again. 4 Operate the power switch (p.32). 06 Sensor cleaning is not possible. Turn the camera off and on again. 4 Operate the power switch (p.32). 10. 20. 30. 40. c50• GO• 70. 80 Shooting Is not possible due to an error. Turn the camera off and on again or re-Install the battery. 4 Operate the power switch. remove and eistall the battery pack again. or use a Canon lens (p.32. 28). • If the error still persists. wrtte down the error No. and contact your nearest Canon Service Center. 287 EFTA01126484 Specifications • Type Type: Recording media: Image sensor size: Compatible lenses: Lens mount: • Image Sensor Type: Effective pixels: Aspect ratio: Oust delete feature: • Recording System Recording format: Image type: Recorded pixels: • Image Processing Picture Style: Basic•: White balance: Noise reduction: Automatic image brightness correction: HigNight tone priority: Lens peripheral illumination correction: Digital. Engle-lens reflex. AF/AE camera with built-in flash SD memory card. SOHC mernary card. SOXC memory card Approx. 22.3 x 14.9 mm Canon EF lenses (in cludng EF-S lenses) (35mm-equivalent focal length is approx. 1.6 times the lens focal length) Canon EF mount CMOS sensor Approx. 18.00 rnegapixels 3:2 Auto. Manual. Oust Delete Data appending Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 JPEG. RAW (14-bit Canon original) RAW+JPEG Large simultaneous recording possible L (Large) : Approx. 17.90 rnegapixels (5184 x 3456) M (Medium) : Approx. 8.00 megapixels (3456 x 2304) SI (Small 1): Approx. 4.50 megapixels (2592 x 1728) S2 (Small 2): Approx. 2.50 megapixels (1920 x 1280) S3 (Small 3): Approx. 350.000 pixels (720 x 480) RAW : Approx. 17.90 rnegapixels (5184 x 3456) During Shooting Auto. Standard. Portrait. Landscape. Neutral. Faithful. Monochrome. User Def. 1- 3 Shoot by ambience selection. Shoot by lighting or scene type Auto. Preset (Daylight. Shade. Cloudy. Tungsten tight. White fluorescent light. Flash). Custom White balance correction and white balance bracketing features provided • Flash color temperature informatbn communication provided Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shots Auto Lighting Optimizer Provided Provided 288 EFTA01126485 Specifications • Viewfinder Type: Coverage: Magnification: Eye point Built-n dope.no aqustment Focusing screen: Mirror: Depth-of-field preview: • Autefocus Type: AF points: Metering range: Focus modes: AF-assist beam: • Exposure Control Metering modes: Metering range: Exposure control: ISO speed: (Recommended exposure index) Exposure compensation: AE lock: Eye-level pentamirror VerticalHorizontal approx. 95% (with Eye point approx. 19 mm) Approx. 0.85x (-1 m'1 with 50mm lens at infinity) Approx. 19 mm (From eyepiece lens center at -1 ma) Approx. 4.0 - +1.0 m'1 (dial) Fixed. Precision Matte Ouidc-return type Prcwided TTL secondary image-registration. phase detection 9 AF points EV -0.5 -18 (at 23°C/73•F. ISO 100) One-Shot AF. Al Servo AF. Al Focus AF. Manual focusing (MF) Sinai series of flashes fred by buil-in flash 63-zone TTL full-aperture metering • Evaluative meterng (linked to all AF ports) • Partial metering (approx. 9% of viewfinder at center) • Spot metering (approx. 4% of viewfinder at center) • Center-weighted average metering EV 1 - 20 (at 23°C/73°F with EF50mm 01.4 USM lens. ISO 100) Program AE (Scene Intelligent Auto. Flash Off. Creative Auto. Portrait. Landscape. Close-up. Sports. Night Portrait. Program), shutter-priority AE. aperture-priority AE. manual exposure. automatic depth-of-field AE Basic gone modes: ISO 100 - 3200 set automatically Creative Zone modes : ISO 100 - 6400 set manually (whole-stop increments), ISO 103 - 6400 set automatically. maximum ISO speed settable for ISO Auto, or ISO expansion to 'H' (equivalent to ISO 12800) Manual: t5 stops ki 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments AEB: ±.2 stops n 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments (Can be combined with manual exposure compensation) Auto: Applied in One-Shot AF mode with evaluative metering when focus is achieved Manual: By AE lock button 289 EFTA01126486 Specific:mons • Shutter Type: Shutter speeds: • Flash Suit-in flash: External flash: Flash metering: Rash ecosere cavitation: FE lodt: PC terminal: • Drive System Drive mode: Ccntnuous shoceng speed: Max. burst: Electronically-controlled. focal-plane shutter 1/4000 sec. to 1/60 sec. (Scene Intelligent Auto mode). X-sync at 1/200 sec. 1/4000 sec. to 30 sec.. bulb (Total shutter speed range. Available range varies by shooting mode.) Retractable. auto pop-up flash Guide No.: Approx. 13/43 (ISO 100. in meters/feet) Flash coverage: Approx. 17mm lens angle of view Recycling time approx. 3 sec. Wireless master triit function provided EX-series Speedlite (Flash functions satiable with the camera) E-TTL II autoflash x2 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments Provided None Single shooting. continuousshooting. self-timer wit 10-sec. or 2-sec delay and 10-sec. delay with continuous shooting Max. approx. 3.7 shots/sec. JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 34 shots RAW. Approx. 6 shots RAW+JPEG LargeFine; Approx. 3 shots • A res are based on Canon's testing standards (ISO 100 and 'Standard' Picture Style) using a 4GB card. • Live View Shooting Aspect ratio settings: 3:2. 4:3. 16:9, 1:1 focusing: Live mode. Face detection Live mode (Contrast detection). Chick made (Phase-difference detection) Manual focusing (Approx. 5x / 10x magnification possible) Evaluative meterrig with the image sensor EV 0 - 20 (at 23°Cf73°F with EF50mm 01.4 USIA lens. ISO 100) Metering modes: Metering range: Grid display. Two types 290 EFTA01126487 Specification • Movie Shooting Movie compression: Audio recording format Recording format: Recording size and frame rate: File size: Focusing: Metering modes: Metering range: Exposure control: Exposure compensation: ISO speed: (Recommended exposure index) Digital zoom: Video snapshots: Sound recording: Grid dispLay: • LCD Monitor Type: Monitor size and dots: Angle adjustment: Brightness adjustment Interface languages: Feature guide: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 Variable (average) bit rate Linear PCM MOV 1920x1080 (Full HD) : 30p/25pf24p 1280x720 (HO) : 80p/50p 640x480 (SD) :30p/25p • 30p: 29.97 fps. 25p: 25.00 fps. 24p: 23.976 fps. 60p: 59.94 fps. 50p: 50.00 fps 1920x1080 (30p/25024p) : Approx. 330 MB/min. 1280x720 (60p/50p) : Approx. 330 MB/min. 640x480 (30p/25p) : Approx. 82.5 MBImki. Same as focusing with Live View shooting Center-weighted average and evaluative metering with the image sensor ' Automatically set by the focusing mode EV 0 -20 (at 23t/73T with EF5Omm 1/1A UShl tern. ISO 100) Program AE for movies and manual exposure t3 stops in 1/3-stop increments (Sal photos: t5 stops) With autoexposure shooting: Automeecally set within ISO 100 - 6400 With manual exposure. ISO 100 - 6400 set automatically/ manually Approx. 3x - 10x Settable to 2 sec./4 sec./8 sec. Stilt-in monaural microphone External stereo microphone terminal provided Sound recording level adjustable. wind filter provided Two types TFT color liquid-crystal monitor Wide. 3.0-in. (3:2) with approx. 1.04 million dots Possible Manual (7 levels) 25 Displayable I 291 EFTA01126488 Specifications • Playback Image display formats: Zoom magnification: Image browsing methods: Highlight alert Movie playback Slide show-. Background music: Bass boost • Post-Processing of Creative filters: Resize: • Direct Printing Compatible printers: Portable images: Reit ordering: • Custom Functions Custom Functions: My Menu registration: Copyright information: • Interface Audio/video OUT/ Digital terminal: Analog video (Compatible with NTSClPALystereo audio output For personal computer communication and direct printing (Hi-Speed LISB equivalent) HOMI rmni OUT terminal: Type C (Auto switching of resolution). CEC-cornpatible External microphone IN terminal: 3.5mm dia. stereo mini-jack Remote control terminal: For Remote Switch RS-60E3 Wireless remote control: Remote Controller RC-6 Eye-Fi card: Compatible Single image. Single image + Info (Basic info. shooting info. histogram). 4-image index. 9-image index. image rotate possible Approx. 1.5x - 10x Single image. jump by 10 or 100 images, by shooting date, by folder. by movies. by stills. by rating Overexposed highlights blink Enabled (LCD monitor. video/audio OUT. HDMI OUT) Bustin speaker Al images. by date. by folder, movies. stills. or by rabng Five transition effects selectable Selectable for slide shows and movie playback Provided Images Grainy BM. Soft focus. Fish-eye effect. Toy camera effect. Miniature effect Possible PictBridge-compatible printers JPEG and RAW images DPOF Version 1.1 compatible 11 Possible Entry and inclusion possible 292 EFTA01126489 Specifications • Power Battery: Battery Pack LP-E8 (Quantity 1) ' AC power can be supplied via AC Adapter Kit ACK-E8 ' With Battery Gip BG-E8 attached. size-AA/LR6 batteries can be used Battery life: With viewfinder shooting: (Based on CIPA Approx.440 shin at 23°C./731F. approx. 400 shois at O'Cl32'F testing standards) With Live View avant?: Approx. 180 skis at 23°C./731F. approx. 150 shois at 0°Cf32'F Movie shoobng time Approx. 1 hr. 40 min. at 23°Cl73•F Approx. 1 hr. 20 min. at 0°C132•F (With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-EB) • Dimensions and Weight Dimensions (W x H x 0): Approx. 133.1 x 99.5x 79.7 rnm/ 52x 3.9x 3.1 in. Weight Approx. 570 g! 20.1 oz. (CIPA Guidelines), Approx. 515 g! 18.2 oz. (Body only) • Operation Environment WAN terrperature range: 0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F Working humidity: 85% or less • Battery Pack LP-E8 Type: Rechargeable lithium-ion battery Rated voltage: 7.2 V DC Battery capacity: t120 mAh Vtbiling terrperatire range: During charing: 6°C - 40°C 143°F - 104°F During shooting: - 40•C 32°F - 104•F Working humidity: 85% or less Dimensions (W x H x 0): Approx. 37.1 x 15.4 x 55.2 mm 11.5 x 0.6 x 2.2 in. Weight Approx. 52 g 11.8 oz. • Battery Charger LC-E8 Compatible battery-. Battery Pack LP-EB Rechargng time: Approx. 2 hours (at 23°C73•F) Rated input: 103 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz) Rated output: 8.4 V DC /720 mA WAN terrperatire large: 6°C - 40°C! 43°F - 104°F Working humidity: 85%a less Dimensions (W x H x 0): Approx. 69x 28x 87.5mm/ 2.7x 1.1 x 3.4 in. Weight Approx. 82 g! 2.9 a 293 EFTA01126490 Speci0cabons • Battery Charger LC-ESE Compatible battery Battery Pack LP-ES Recharging time: Approx. 2 hours (at 23°C/73•F) Rated input: 100 - 240 V AC (50/60 Hz) Rated output: 8.4 V DC 1720 mA 'Abriong temperature range: 6°C - 40•C 143°F - 104°F Woiking humidity. 85% or less Mansions (W x H x D): Approx. 69 x 28 x 87.5 mm 12.7 x 1.1 x 3.4 in. Weight: Approx. 82 g! 2.9 oz. • EF-518-55mm f13.5-5.6 IS II Angle of view: Diagonal extent: 74°20' - 27°50' Horizontal extent: 64°30' - 23°20' Vertical extent: 45°30' -15.40' Lens construction: 11 elements in 9 groups Minimum aperture: f/22 - 36 Closest focusing dance: 0.25 m 10.82 fl. (From image sensor plane) Max. magni0caban: 0.34x (at 55 mm) Field of view: 207 x 134 - 67 x 45mm/8.1 x5.3 - 2.6x t.8 in. (at 0.25 m10.82 ft) Image Stabilizer. Lens shift type Filter size: 58 mm Lens cap: E-58 Max. diameter x length: Approx. 68.5 x 70 mm 12.7 x 2.8 in. Weight: Approx. 200 g / 7.1 oz. Hood: EW-60C (sold separately) Case: LP814 (sold separatety) • EF-518-55mm fi3.5-5.6 III Angle of view: Diagonal extent: 74°20' - 27°50' Horizontal extent: 64°30' - 23°20' Vertical extent: 45°30' -15.40' Lens construction: 11 elements in 9 groups Minimum aperture: (/22 - 36 Closest focusing cislance: 0.25 m 10.82 fl. (From image sensor plane) Max. magni0cabon: 0.34x (at 55mm) Field of view: 207 x 134 - 67 x 45 mm / 8.1 x 5.3 - 2.6 x 1.8 in. (at 0.25 m /0.82 ft.) Filter size: 58 mm Lens cap: E-58 Max. diameter x length: Approx. 68.5 x 70.0 mm! 2.7 x 2.8 in. 294 EFTA01126491 Specifications Weight Approx. 195g/6.9 oz. Hood: EW-60C (sold separately) Case: LP814 (sold separately) • EF-S18-135mm f13.5-5.6 IS Angle of view: Diagonal extent: 74°20' - 11°30' Horizontal extent: 64°30' - 9*30' Vertical extent: 45°30' - 8'20' Lens construction: 16 elements in t2 groups Minimum aperture: 822 - 36 Closest focusing ddancs•: At 18mm focal length: 0.49 in /1.61 ft. (327 x 503 mm 112.9 x 19.8 in. field of view) At 135mm kcal length: 0A5 m 11.48 ft. (75 x 112 mm/ 3.0 x 4.4 it field of view) Distance from image sensor plane Max. magnification: 0.21x (at 135mm) Image Stabilizer: Lens shift type Filter size: 67 mm Lens cap: E-67 Max. diameter x length: Approx. 75.4 x 101 mm 13.0 x 4.0 et Weight Approx. 455 g / 16.0 oz. Hood: EW-738 (sold separately) Case: LP1116 (sold separately) • All the data above is based on Canon's testing standards and CIPA (Camera 8 Imaging Products Association) testing standards and guidelines. • Dimensions. maximum diameter. length and weight listed above are based on CIPA Guidelines (except weight for camera body only). • Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice. • If a problem occurs vnli a non-Canon lens attached to the camera. consult the respective lens maker. 295 EFTA01126492 Trademarks • Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated. • Windows is a trademark or registered trademark of Kbcrcsoft Corporation n the United States and other countries. • Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Inc. kr the United States and other countries. • SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C. LLC. • HDMI. HDMI logo. and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are a trademark or registered trademark of HDMI Licensng LLC. • All other corporate and product names and trademarks mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective owners. About MPEG-4 Licensing Mtn product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be used for encoding MPEG-4 complant video andror decoding MPEG-4 ocmplant video that was encoded oNy (1) fora personal and non-commercial moose or (2) by a video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video. No license is granted or implied for any ether use for MPEG-4 standard: • Notice displayed in English as required Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genune Canon accessories. Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as fee. etc.. caused by the malfunction of non- genune Canon accessories (e.g.. a leakage and/cc explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories. although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis. 296 EFTA01126493 Safety Warnings Follow these safeguards and use the equipment properly to prevent injury. death. and material damage. Preventing Serious Injury or Death • To prevent fire. excessive heat. chenscal leakage. and exp!ceacns. follow the safeguards below. - Do not use any batteries. power sources. and accessories not specified in this booklet Do not use any home-made or modified batteries. Do not Sheri-emu!. disassemble. or modify the battery pack or backup battery. Do not apply heat or apply solder to the battery pack or back-up battery. Do not expose the battery pack or bath-up battery 10 me or water. And do not subject the battery pack or back-up battery to strong physical stuck. - Do not install the battery pack or back-up battery in reversed polanty (4 -). Do not mix new and old or different types of batteries. - Do not recharge the battery pack °Wade the allowable ambient temperatin range of Ot - eirC (32"F - 104-9. Also, do not exceed the recharging time. - Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera. accessories. connecting Cables. MC. • Keep the back-up battery away from ctudren. II a child swallows the battery consult a physician immediately. (Battery chemicals may harm the stomach and intestines.) • When disposing of a battery pack or backup battery. insulate the electrical contacts with tape to prevent caned with other metallic objects a batteries. This is to prevent fire or an explosion. • If excessive heat. smoke, or Pones are emitted diming battery pack recharging. Immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to step the recharging and prevent a tire. • If the battery pack a back-up battery take. changes 0310r. deforms. or tithe smokes fumes. remove it immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process. • Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes. skin. and ciztAng. It can cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage contacts your eyes. sltht or clothing. flush the affected area with lots of dean water without rubbing A See a physician immediately. • During the recharging. keep the equipment away from the reach of children. The cord can accidentally choke the Chid a give an electrical shock. • Do not leave any cords near a heal scarce. II can deform the cord or melt the insulation and cause a tre or etedrical shock. • Do not lore the flash al someone &Wing a car. II may cause an accident. • Do not me the flaith near a person's eyes. II may impair the person's ASA When using flash to photograph an infant keep at least I meter away. • Before storing the earners or accessory Mien not in use. remove the battery pack and disconnect the power pkrg. This is to prevent electrical shcck heal generation. and fire. • Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an explosion or fire. 297 EFTA01126494 • If you drop Ille emapmenl and the casing breaks open to expose the internal pans. do not touch the Internal parts due to the possibility of electrical shock. • Do not densemble or modify the equipment. High-voltage internal parts can cause electrkal shock. • Do not look al the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or lens. Doing so may damage your vision. • Keep the camera from the reach of small children. The neck strap can accidentally choke the dint • Do not store the equipment in dusty or humid places. This Is to prevent tire and electrical shock. • Setae using the camera inside an airplane or hospital. check if A Is allowed. Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane's instruments or the hospital's medical equipment. • To prevent lire and electrical shock. Mow the sateguards below: - Always insert the power plug al the way in. - Do not handle a power plug with wet hands. - When unplugging a power plug. grasp and pid the plug instead of the cad. - Do not scratch. cut. or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy object on the cord. Also do not Wel or lie the cords. - Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet. - Do not use a cord whose insulation has been damaged. • Occasionally unplug the power plug and use a dry cloth to clean on the dust around the power outlet. If the surrowiding is dusty. humid. or oily. the dust on the power outlet may become moist and short-circuk the outlet to cause a fire. Preventing Injury or Equipment Damage • Do not leave equipment inside a car under the hot sun or near a heal source. The equipment may become hot and cause Pm burns. • Do not carry the camera around while It is attached to a biped. Doing so may cause Injury. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to supped the camera and lens. • Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera under the sum without the lens cap attached. Otherwise. the lens may concentrate the sums rays and cause a fire. • Do not cover or wrap the battery-recharging apparatus with a cloth. Doing so may leap heal within and cause the catnip to deform or catch lire. • If you drop the camera In water or if water or metal fragments enter Inside the camera. promptly remove the battery pack and back-up battery. This is to prevent fire and elearkal ?Mock. • Do not use or leave the battery pack or back-up battery in a ha environment. Doing so may cause battery leakage or a skein, battery We. The battery pack or back-up battery can a130 become hot and cause skin bums. • Do not use pant thinner. tenzene. or other organic solvents to dean the equipment. Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard. II the product does not work properly or requires repair, contact your dealer or your nearest Canon Service Center. 298 EFTA01126495 Digital Camera Model D5126311 Systems This device complieswith Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference. and (2) this device must accept any interference received. including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for class 8 digital devices, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful eiterference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not intalled and used in accordance with the instructions. may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However. there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this eqiipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception. which can be determesed by turning the equipment off and on. the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: — Reorient cc relocate the receiving antenna. — Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. — Connect the equipment into an outlet on a trail different from that to which the receiver is connected. — Consult the dealer or an experienced radiofIV technician for help. The cable with the ferrite core provided with the digital camera must be used with this equipment in order to comply with Class B limits in Subpart 8 of Part 15 of the FCC rules. Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications should be made. you could be required to stop operation of the equipment. Canon U.S.A_ Inc. One Canon Plaza. Lake Success. NY 11002, USA Tel No. (516)328-5600 This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. & When connecting to and using a household power outlet. use only AC Adapter Kit ACK£8 (rated input: 100-240 V AC 50/60 Hz. rated output 7.0 V DC). Using anything else can cause fire. overheat g, or electrical shock. 299 EFTA01126496 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1. SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS — This manual contains inponant safety and operativ nstructions for Battery Charger LC-E8 & LC-ESE. 2. Before using the charger, read all instructions and cautionary remarks on (1) the charger. (2) the battery pack, and (3) the product using the battery pack. 3. CAUTION — To reduce risk of injury, charge only the Battery Pack LP-E8. Other types of batteries may burst. causng personal injury and other damage. 4. Do not expose the charger to rain or snow. 5. Use of an attachment not recommended or sold by Canon may result in lire. electric shock. or personal injury. 6. To reduce risk of damage to electric plug and cord, pull by plug rather than by cord when disconnectLng charger. 7. Make sure cord is located so that it will not be stepped on. tripped over. or otherwise subjected to damage or stress. 8. Do not operate the charger with damaged cord or plug - replace them immediately. 9. Do not operate the charger if it has received a sharp blow, been dropped. or otherwise damaged in any way: take it to a qualified serviceman. 10. Do not disassemble the charger, lake it to a qualified serviceman when service or repair is required. Incorrect reassembly may result in a risk of electric shock or fire. 11. To reduce risk of electric shock. triplug charger from outlet before attempting any mantenance or clearing. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION Unless otherwise stated in this manual, there are no user serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified serviceman. USA and Canada only: The Lithium ion/polymer battery that powers the product is recyclable. Please call 1400-4-BATTERY for information on how to recycle this battery. For CA. USA only Included Lithium battery contains Perdficiraba Material — spend handing may apply. See wmv.dtsc.cagovelazardouswastetperchlorate/ for details. CAUTION RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION. EFTA01126497 14 Software Start Guide This chapter gives an overview of the software in the EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk (CD-ROM) provided with the camera and explains how to install the software in a personal computer. It also explains how to view the pdf files in the Software Instruction Manual CD-ROM. 1 g I 71 1 EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk (Software) Software Instruction Manual EFTA01126498 Software Start Guide EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk I This disk contains various software for EOS DIGITAL cameras. EOS Utility With the camera connected to a personal computer, EOS Utility enables you to transfer still photos and movies shot with the camera to the computer. You can also use the personal computer to set various camera settings and shoot remotely with the computer connected to the camera. Also, you can copy background music tracks, such as EOS Sample Music', to the card. • Five original background music tracks provided by Canon. Use EOS Utility to copy the background music tracks to the card, and you can play the background music during playback of video snapshot albums. movies. and slide shows with the camera. Digital Photo Professional This software is recommended for users who mainly shoot RAW images. You can view, edit, process, and print RAW images at high speed. You can also edit JPEG images while retaining the original images. ZoomBrowser EX (Win) / ImageBrowser (Mac) This software is recommended for users who mainly shoot JPEG images. You can easily view, edit, organize, and print JPEG images. You can also play and edit movies (MOV files) and video snapshot albums and extract still photos from movies. Picture Style Editor You can edit Picture Styles and create and save original Picture Style files. This software Is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in processing images. 302 EFTA01126499 Saware Start Gunle Installing the Software • Do not conned the camera to your computer before you instal the software. The software will not be instaled correctly. • Even if a previous version of the software is instaled. instal the software by following the steps below (the newer version will overwrite the previous version). 1 Insert EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk (CD-ROM). • For Macintosh. double-dick to open the CD-ROM icon displayed on the desktop, then double-click on [Canon EOS MOW Installer]. 2 Click [Easy Installation] and follow the on-screen instructions to install. • For Macintosh. click (Install). Camp. COS DIGITAL lehnion 3 Click [Restart] and remove the CD-ROM after the computer restarts. • When the computer has restarted, the installation is complete. 303 EFTA01126500 Software Stan Guide Software Instruction Manual Contains the Software Instruction Manuals. Copying and Viewing the Instruction Manual PDFs 1 Insert the [Software INSTRUCTION MANUAL) CD-ROM into your computer. 2 Double-click the CD-ROM icon. • For Windows, the icon is displayed in ((My) Computer). • For Macintosh. the icon is displayed on the desktop. 3 Copy the [English) folder to your computer. • Instruction Manual PDFs with the names below are copied. Windows Macintosh EOS Wily R&M Eioc EUx_xM_E xx Digital Photo Professional DPPx.xW Um DPPx.xM_E xx ZoomBrowser EX/ Image Browser ZBx.xWExx _ _ IBx.xMExx _ _ Picture Style Editor PSEx.xW E Jac PSEx.xM_E_xr 4 Double-click the copied PDF file. • Adobe Reader (Version 6.0 or later) must be installed in your computer. • Adobe Reader can be downloaded free from the Internet. 304 EFTA01126501 15 Quick Reference Guide and Instruction Manual Index Menu Operations p.306 Image-recording Quality p.307 a?, Picture Style p.307 @ Quick Control Screen p.308 Nomenclature p.309 Basic Zone Modes p.311 $ Using the Built-in Flash p.311 Creative Zone Modes p.312 P: Program AE p.312 Tv: Shutter-priority AE p.312 Av : Aperture-priority AE p.312 AF : AF Mode p.313 ca AF Point p.313 ISO: ISO Speed p.314 % Drive Mode p.314 Cs Live View Shooting p.315 Shooting Movies p.316 Image Playback p.317 EFTA01126502 Creative Zone Modes Quick Reference Guide Menu Operations] 1. Press the <MENU> button to display the menu. 2. Press the <-4k> > key to select a tab, then press the <AY> key to select the desired item. 3. Press <e> to display the setting. 4. After setting the item, press <0>. Basic Zone Modes Movie Shooting Mode A ALM Oa MIN N .0 ilia ••••••••• •Ilialwal ban ONO •--- Tabs Quality It Beep Dub* Release shutter without card Image review 2 sec. Peripheral Ohioan. correct Red-eye reduc. Disable Flash control Menu items Menu settings EFTA01126503 Ouid Reference Guide Quality A ISM 5I84x3456 [ 5I41- /IL AL AM AM AS1 AS1 52 S3 In+AL Image-recording Quality Select (fl Quality]. then press < Press the <4110.> key to select the quality, then press <e>. Imagegecording quality Recorded pixels Picture Style* Possible shots Press the <4;;;.> button. • Press the <ille. > key to select th Picture Style, then press <e>. l79 El ED ER VIA i Style Description -z, Auto Color tones optimized for the particular scene. 221 Standard Vivid colors and sharp images. E'Sl. Portrak Nice skin tones and slightly sharp images. WI Landscape Wed blue skies and greenery and very sharp images. 22L Monochrome Black-and-white images. • For < Etar > (Neutral) and <IM1> (Faithful), see page 82. e 307 EFTA01126504 Quick Reference Guide g Quick Control c Press the <ID> button. ► The Quick Control screen will appear. Baste Zone Modes Creative Zone Modes Shutter speed Shooting mode Exposure compensation/ 7 I AEB setting — Picture Style — AF mode — White — balance M 1/125 I • k -A1 Wuri if SHOT Q 22ZNIL huher sorhd F56 320 Drive mode p "um C i S cori uot 0 X al raiPare Aperture Highlight tone priority ISO speed r Flash exposure compensation —Auto Lighting 7 Optimizer L L flash function Image-recording quality Metering mode • In Basic Zone modes, the seriable functions differ depending on the shooting mode. • Press the <<•> key to select a function, then turn the <n> dial to set it. 308 EFTA01126505 Ouid Reference Guide Nomenclature Power swatch - Mode Dial <ISO> ISO speed <S> Flash setting button button <S> Main Dial Shutter button Focus mode switch <O> Live View shooting/ Movie shooting button camel> Aperture/Exposure compensation button COD> Setting button <4(-> AE lock button <M> AF point selection button C.) Cross keys Access lamp 309 EFTA01126506 OuiCk Reference Guide Shooting Settings Display 1 Shutter speed Aperture 7 Shooting mode ISO speed Exposure level indicator White balance Picture Style - AF mode - Quick Control - icon P 1/125 F5.6 p;3200 I • Battery check 4=I =I= OK NG ruts s =lot ( 514) Viewfinder Information AF points Auto Lighting Optimizer - Built-in flash func. setting Image-recording I quality L Possible shots L Metering mode Drive mode AF point activation indicator <.> Spot metering circle AE lock — Focus confirmation light Flash-ready —J Max. burst Flash exposure compensation Monochrome shooting Shutter speed ISO speed Aperture— — Exposure level indicator 310 EFTA01126507 Ouick Reference Guide Basic Zone Modes All the settings necessary for shooting are set automatically. You just press the shutter button, and the camera does the rest. essie zone G` Scene Intelligent Auto El Flash Off al Creative Auto Portrait • Pressing the <E> button will display the Quick Control screen. In the oninktarieugi shooting mode. press the < AY> key to select the function. then press the < 4Illo.> key or turn the dial to set it as desired. TA Landscape & Close-up k., Sports !1 Night Portrait Using the Built-in Flash Basic Zone Modes If necessary, the built-in flash will pop-up automatically in low-light or backlit conditions (except in the <ID> <TA> cikk.> modes). Creative Zone Modes • Press the <y> button to raise the built-in flash, then shoot. 311 EFTA01126508 Quick Reference Guide Creative Zone Modes] te e You can change the camera settings as desired to shoot in various ways. P: Program AE The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture in the same way as the <at > mode. • Set the Mode Dial to <P >. Tv: Shutter-priority AE Tv 1 11s [sr r.',1[Hri • Set the Mode Dial to <Tv>. • Turn the <a> dial to set the desired shutter speed, then focus the subject ► The aperture will be set automatically. • If the aperture display blinks, turn the < > dial until it stops blinking. Av: Aperture-priority AE Av • Set the Mode Dial to < >. • Tum the <ga> dial to set the desired aperture. then focus the subject ► The shutter speed will be set automatically. • If the shutter speed display blinks. turn the <n> dial until it stops blinking. 312 EFTA01126509 Guick Reference Guide C) AF Point * i • Set the lens focus mode switch to <AF>. • Press the <► AF> button. • Press the < > key or turn the <n> dial to select the AF mode, then press <@)>. ONE SHOT (One-Shot AF): For still subjects Al FOCUS(AI Focus AF): Switches the AF mode automatically Al SERVO(AI Servo AF): For moving subjects I • Press the <133> button. I • Press the <4, a key to select the AF point. • While looking through the viewfinder, you can select the AF point by turning the <a> dial until the desired AF point flashes in red. • Pressing <€)> toggles the AF point selection between the center AF point and automatic AF point selection. 313 EFTA01126510 Ouick Reference Genie ISO: ISO Speed Press the <ISO> button. • Press the <0> key or tum the <n> dial to select the !so ea speed, then press <e>. se • When [AUTO] is selected, the IS-. —oil ISO speed is set automatically. When you press the shutter button halfway, the ISO speed setting will be displayed. M.-- 03 saro 1% no kl:TO 000 $503 3203 6O3 la Drive Mode* Dwe raft Continuous exconf • Press the <419.1i6), button. • Press the <400.> key or turn the <a> dial to select the drive mode, then press <e>. K : Single shooting la : Continuous shooting id): Self-timer:10 sec/Remote contror e2 : Self-timer:2 sec k: Self-timer:Continuous• • The 10> and <6k > drive modes can be selected in all shooting modes (except <'s>). 314 EFTA01126511 Guick Reference Guide O Live View Shooting • Press the <a> button to display " the Live View image. At... Jr • Press the shutter button halfway to focus. • Press the shutter button completely to take the picture. • Live View shooting settings will appear under the [01 menu tab in Basic Zone modes and under the [O€J menu tab in Creative Zone modes. • Battery Life with Live View Shooting Temperature I No Flash I 50% Flash Use At 23t 173°F Approx. 200 shots Approx. 180 shots I 315 EFTA01126512 Ouick Reference Guide Shooting Movies Set the Mode Dial to <'if>. 0 Press the shutter button halfway to focus. ", Press the <a> button to start shooting a movie. To stop movie shooting, press the <0> button again. Recording movie M!!I 316 EFTA01126513 Ouick Reference Guide Image Playback INFO. Shooting information C14-0. 0, Playback fp] Erase I 317 EFTA01126514 Index 10-sec. or 2-eac. delay 89 1280x720 150 1920x1080 150 1st-curtain sync 182 2nd-curtan sync 182 4- or 9-image index display 202 640x480 150 9-point AF auto selection 85 A AC Adapter Kit 260 Access lamp 30 Accessories 3 A-DEP (Automatic Depth-c4-Field AE) 101 Adobe RGB 121 AE lock 107 AEB 105,252 AF (Focusing) 83,85 AF point 85 Al FOCUS (Al Focus AF) 84 Al SERVO (Al Servo AF) Al Servo AF 53,84 Apertwe-priority AE 98 Aspect ratio 129 AudioNideo OLIT 210, 221 Auto Lighting Optimizer 49,109 Auto playback 215 Auto power off 32,167 Auto reset 171 Auto rotate d vertical images 174 Autorocus 83,85 Automatic selection of AF point ......85 Av (Aperture-priority AE) 96 AN OLIT 210,221 B B/W (Monochrome) 82. 114 318 Background music 217 Basic Zone modes 22 Bass boost 213 Battery 26, 28, 33 Battery check 33 Battery Grip 33, 276 Beeper 186 Black-and-white image 65, 82,114 Bracketing 105,120 Brightness (exposure) 103 Adjust (exposure compensation) 103 Auto exposure bracketing (AEB) 105, 252 Autoexposure lock (AE lock).... 107 Measurement method (Metering mode) 102 Built-in flash 90 BULB (Bulb exposure) 100 C a (Creative Auto) 56 Cable 3.218, 221, 236, 277 Camera Camera shake 122 Clear camera settings 176 Holding the camera 39 Settings display 175 Camera shake 38, 39 Card 15, 29, 45 Card reminder 166 Eye-Fi 265 Format 45 Problem 30, 46 SD speed class 141 SDHC/SDXC 29 Write-protect 29 Center-weighted average metering 102 Charger 24, 26 EFTA01126515 Clearing (Image sensor). 184,187 Clear camera settings 176 Close-ups 61 Color space (color reproduction range) 121 Color temperature 117 Color tone 113 Continuous 170 Continuous shooting 88 Contrast 113 Copyright information 172 Creative Auto 56 Creative filters 230 * ioon 4 Creative Zone modes 22 Custan Functions 250 Custan WB 117 Date/Time 34 DC coupler 260 Depth-of-field preview 98 Dial 18, 93 Digital terminal 221, 236 Dioptric adjustment 39 Direct erring 235 DPOF 245 Drive mode 20, 58, 88 Dust Delete Data 185 E Erase (image) 224 Error codes 287 Evaluative metering 102 Exposure compensation 103 Exposure level increments 252 Extension 171 External Speedkte 263 Eyecup 282 Eye-Fi card 286 Eyepiece cover.. 25, 262 F Faithful 82 FE lock 108 Feature guide 48 FEB 181 Fie name 170 Fie size 76,151, 226 Fiter effect 114, 230 Final rage simulation 127,147 Fine (Image-recording molly) 76 Firmware Ver. 272 Fish-eye effect 232 Flash Butt-in flash 90 Custom Functions 183 Effective range 90 External Speedlite 263 FE lock 108 Flash control 180 Flash exposure compensation 104 Flash off 55, 58, 84 Flash-sync speed 252, 264 Manual flash 182, 199 Red-eye reduction 91 Shutter sync. (1s1/2nd curtain) 182 Wireless 189 Flash exposure compensation 104 Flash mode 182 Flash-sync contacts 18 Focus confirmation light SO FOCUS lock 53 Focus mode switch 36, 87, 138 319 EFTA01126516 Index focusing AF mode 83 AF point selecton 85 AF-assist beam 86.255 Beeper 166 Difficult-to-focus subjeds....87 135 Manual focusing 87. 138 Out of focus 38.39, 87.135 Recompose 53 Folder Create/Select 168 Format 45 Format (card initialization) 45 Frame rate 150 Full Auto (Scene Intelligent Auto)...50 Full High-Deftlitial (Full HD) 150.210 Function availability table 268 Grainy 8N1 232 Grid display 129,161 H HDMI 210. 218 HDMI CEC 219 High ISO speed noise reduction 254 High-Definition (HD) 150,210 Highlight alert 228 Highlight tone priority 159.254 Histogram (Brightness/RGB) 228 Hot shoe 263 Househdd power 260 ICC profile 121 Image Auto playbadt 215 Auto rotate 174 Erase 224 Highlight alert 228 Histogram 228 Image characteristics (Picture Style) 81, 112, 115 Index 202 Jump display (Image browsing) 203 Magnified view 204 Manual rotate 205 No 170 Playback 71.201 Protect 222 Review time 186 Shooting information 226 Transfer 285 View on TV 210,218 mage area 37 mage dust prevention.. 184, 185, 187 mage review time 186 mage Stabilizer (lens) 38 mage Zone 22 mage-recording quality 76 ndex display 202 SO speed 79 Auto 80 ISO expansion 252 Maximum ISO speed with ISO Auto 80 J JPEG 76 Jump display 203 320 EFTA01126517 Index L Landscape 60.82 Language selection Large (Image-recording quality) 76 LCD monitor 15 Brightness adjustment 167 Image playback 71, 201 Menu screen 43, 270 Screen color 179 Shooting settings display......20, 47 Van -Angle 31,5/ Lens 23,36 Image Stabilizer 38 Lock release 37 Peripheral illumination correction 110 Live View shooting 54,123 Aspect ratio 129 Face detection Live mode (AF) 132 Grid display 129 Information display 126 Live mode (AF) 131 Manual focusing 87,138 Meterkig tram 130 Possible shots 125 Quick Control 128 Quick mode (AF) 136 Long exposure noise reduction 253 Long exposures 100 Low-level format 46 M M (Manual exposure) 99 Macro photography 61 Magnified view 138.204 Malfunction 278 Manual exposure 99.111 Manual focus (MF) 87,138 Manual reset 171 Manual selection (AF) 85 Maximum burst 76, 77 35 Medium (Image-recording quality) 76, 234 Memory card 15, 29, 45 Menu 43 My Menu 258 Setting procedure 44 Settings 270 Wag icon 4 Metering mode 102 MeteMg timer 130, 161 MF (Manual foaming) 87, 138 Microphone 142 M.-nature effect 232 Mirror lockup 122, 255 Mode Dial 22 Monochrome 65, 82,114 Movie 141 AF mode 149,157 Autoexposure 142 Editing out first and last SMOGS 214 Enjoying 210 File size 151 Frame rate 150 Grid display 161 Information display 146 Manual exposure 144 Manual focusing 142 Metering Mier 161 Movie digital zoom 152 Movie recording Se 150 Playback 212 Quick Control 149 Recording time 151 Sound recording 160 Stir photo shooting 148 Video snapshots 153 Video snapshots album 153 View on TV 210, 218 321 EFTA01126518 kids My Menu 258 N Neutral 82 Night Portrait ea Night scene 80,63 No 170 Noise reduction High ISO speed 254 Long exposures 253 Nomenclature 18 Non-Canon flash units 264 Normal (Image-recording quality)...76 NTSC 150. 272 O ONE SHOT (One-Shot AF) 83 P (Program AE) 74 PAL 150,272 238 Partial metering 102 Peripheral illumination correction 110 Personal white balance 118 PictBridge 235 Picture Style 81.112, 115 Pixels 76 Playback 71,201 Portrait 59, 81 Possible shots 33, 78.125 Power Auto power off 167 Battery check 33 Household power 260 Possible shots 33, 76,125 Recharge 26 Predictive (AI Servo) Pressing completely 40 Paper settings (printing) Pressing halfway 40 Printing 235 Layout 239 Paper settings 238 Pnnt Order (CIPOF).. 245 Pnntmg effects 240 Till correction 243 Trmming 243 Program AE 74 Program shift 75 Protect (image erase-protection).. 222 Q El (Quick Control) 41, 64, 208 Quick mode (AF) 136 R Rating Rating mark RAW RAW+JPEG Recharge Red-eye reduction Release shutter without card Remote control shooting Remote switch Resize Revert to default settings Rotate (image) 174, 206, 243 S Safety warnings 297 Saturation 113 SD card 29, 45 SDHC and SDXC cards 29, 45 Self-b-ner 64, 89 Sensor cleaning 184,187 Sepia (Monochrome) 65,114 Sharpness 113 206 206 76,78 76,78 26 91 186 261 262 233 176 322 EFTA01126519 Index Shoot by ambience selection 65 Shoot by lighting or scene type 68 Shooting information display 226 Shooting mode 22 A-DEP (Automatic Depth-of-Field AE) 101 Av (Aperture-priority AE) 96 M (Manual exposure) 99 P (Program AE) 74 Tv (Shutter-priority AE) 94 at (Scene intalgent Auto) 50 CO (Flash OM 55 lI (Creabve Auto) 56 (Portrait) 59 Sik (Landscape) 60 S. (Close-up) 61 48, (Sports) 62 gi (Night Portrait) 63 It (Movie shooting) 141 Shooting settings display 20, 47 Shutter button 40 Shutter sync 182 Shutter-priority AE 94 Single image display 71 Single &Wang 58.269 Single-point AF 85 Sideshow 215 Small (Image-reaming quality) 78, 234 Soft focus 232 Software 3, 301 Speaker 212 Sports 62 Spot metering 102 sRGB 121 Stopped-down aperture 98 Snap 25 System map 278 Temperature warning 139, 183 Tone pnonty 159, 254 Toning effect (Monochrome) 114 Toy camera effect 232 Tramming (pnnting) 243 Tripod socket 19 Tv (Shutter-pnonly AE) 94 U USB (Digital) terminal 238 V Van-Angle LCD monitor 31, 54 Video snapshot 153 Video snapshot album 153 Video system 150, 221, 272 View on TV 210,218 Viewfinder 21 Dioptric a4ustment 39 Volume (Movie playback) 213 WS (White balance) 117 White balance 117 Bracketing 120 Correction 119 Custom 117 Personal 118 Wind filter 161 Wireless flash shooting 189 Custom wi'eless shooting 194 Easy vrireless shoottig 191 323 EFTA01126520 Canon CANON INC. 30.2. Shknomaruko 3-chcene. Olta•ku. Tokyo 148.8601. Japan USA 0E4 Caen Plea Lao. Scotts NY 1100.11911.U.SA. Foe MI roues o/neenre 10.11. Mlle fru in the US. 1.240.0.1.111011 CANADA CANON CANADA MC. NEADOM/ITERS c,90 Coo Het onsopuuos Dem LST 1111.Canee CANON CANADAINC. MONTREAL BRANCH 5900. CH0o.U.Not P.Mefilm Outlec KIT WI. Cead4 CANON CANADAINC. CALGARY 0010E 21211.101, See. NE Calgat. Aeons T25 7117. Cones Fee S Mouilos COM serin2 ths peo6/C1.0114.11re 1 Cara 14/0011CANOH EUROPE. ONION EUROPA KY. AFRICA, Surnmeente $941. 1155 11 Debecon.Tho Nexencb ADDLE EAST CANON FRANCE BAB, 12.Coa Oa PeeNe 4 PIA Mums'. 92414 Cenbeos Oadao Dee CANON UK LTD. wmonseRogIe.Sety R112 MT Veto Keeler. CANON DEUTSCHLAND embil Europa FoltsheA10.47007114110.11400 CANON HALM SmA. VI /Nee S. 210/2111, 0010.11001131. nary CANON Schweiz/LG. Youoneenno I?. lee OWSkon. Soltrtee Canon00S Zamegossa 11.4.12301.40o..10111 CANON Esp408.A. Av. De foroom6 •Notedas 21101 Wee Soon CANON Pothell SA. Rao /11/0 N SINa 14 MAN. 2610016 Amadora. PceLqa CEICIRD. — CANON LATIN MERICA. WC. SOUTH ALDRICA 723 Yucefon1 Yet Sub 4031.1e1.11L 13126.U.SA ADA CANON (ChNol Co.. LTD. HI /nee DueJo; HoS9 Jaw, Steel COrigetog Duna. 1e1o0 1001C1. COIN CANON HONOKONO CO.. LTD. 19,F.Trw Moecpoit Toe/ 1014.001/ Die HA9hAm. KoMoct HON KW. CANON SWIG/PORI Pre. LTD. 1 leleweel Acme. 1104411 KNIPP sw Twat 2110400111111122 CM1011 KOREA CONSUMER IMAGINE INC. CanalBS Tower SF. rit(412 Someommeme Ceiglarnoo. Seat Kula OCEAN CA11011 AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 1 lean Ile Doe Hoe Roe. Sere NSW 2111 Aoyelo CANON NEW ZIALAle LTD. Acres Baas Pa. Aerie. Dee 114/00.AxWel. Now 2001 CANON MARKETING JAPAN INC. 16.6. Koteuri Scromo.1.1noeku. Tee 101011. Jaen JAPAN This Instruction Manual booklet is current as of January 2011. For intonation on the camera's compatibility with any accessories and lenses introduced after this date, contact any Canon Service Center. CPH-€001.001 11) CANON INC. 2012 EFTA01126521